Allied-telesis AT-FS970M Series Bedienungsanleitung

Stöbern Sie online oder laden Sie Bedienungsanleitung nach Computerhardware Allied-telesis AT-FS970M Series herunter. Allied Telesis AT-FS970M Series User Manual Benutzerhandbuch

  • Herunterladen
  • Zu meinen Handbüchern hinzufügen
  • Drucken
  • Seite
    / 193
  • Inhaltsverzeichnis
  • LESEZEICHEN
  • Bewertet. / 5. Basierend auf Kundenbewertungen
Seitenansicht 0
613-001916 Rev. A
AT-FS970M Series
Fast Ethernet Switches
AT-FS970M/8
AT-FS970M/8PS
AT-FS970M/8PS-E
AT-FS970M/24C
AT-FS970M/24PS
AT-FS970M/48
AT-FS970M/48PS
AT-FS970M/16F8-LC
Management Software
Command Line Interface User’s Guide
AlliedWare Plus Version 2.3.1
Seitenansicht 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 ... 192 193

Inhaltsverzeichnis

Seite 1 - AT-FS970M Series

613-001916 Rev. AAT-FS970M SeriesFast Ethernet Switches AT-FS970M/8 AT-FS970M/8PS AT-FS970M/8PS-E AT-FS970M/24C AT-FS970M/24PS AT-FS970M/48 AT-

Seite 2 - Copyright

Contents10Chapter 17: Domain Name System (DNS) ...351Over

Seite 3

Chapter 4: Basic Command Line Management Commands100 SHOW SYSTEM  WRITEExamplesThis example performs the SHOW INTERFACE command for port 4 from the

Seite 4

Chapter 64: Private Port VLANs1000Displaying Private VLANsThe SHOW VLAN PRIVATE-VLAN command in the Privileged Exec mode displays the private VLANs cu

Seite 5

1001Chapter 65Private Port VLAN CommandsThe private port VLAN commands are summarized in Table 105 and described in detail within the chapter.Table 10

Seite 6

Chapter 65: Private Port VLAN Commands1002NO VLANSyntaxno vlan vidParametersvidSpecifies the VID of the VLAN you want to delete. You can specify just

Seite 7

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1003PRIVATE-VLANSyntaxprivate-vlan vidParametersvidSpecifies a VLAN identifier. The range is 2 to 4094. The

Seite 8

Chapter 65: Private Port VLAN Commands1004SHOW VLAN PRIVATE-VLANSyntaxshow vlan private-vlanParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this

Seite 9

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1005SWITCHPORT MODE PRIVATE-VLAN HOSTSyntaxswitchport mode private-vlan host vidParametersvidSpecifies the V

Seite 10 - Contents

Chapter 65: Private Port VLAN Commands1006SWITCHPORT MODE PRIVATE-VLAN PROMISCUOUSSyntaxswitchport mode private-vlan promiscuous vidParametersvidSpeci

Seite 11

1007Chapter 66Voice VLAN CommandsThe voice VLAN commands are summarized in Table 106 and described in detail within the chapter.Table 106. Voice VLAN

Seite 12

Chapter 66: Voice VLAN Commands1008NO SWITCHPORT VOICE VLANSyntaxno switchport voice vlanParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse this comm

Seite 13

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1009SWITCHPORT VOICE DSCPSyntaxswitchport voice dscp valueParametersvalueSpecifies a DSCP value of 0 to 63.M

Seite 14

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide101ENABLESyntaxenableParametersNoneModeUser Exec mode DescriptionUse this command to move from the User Exec

Seite 15

Chapter 66: Voice VLAN Commands1010SWITCHPORT VOICE VLANSyntaxswitchport voice vlan <vid>|priority <value>|dynamicParametersvidSpecifies t

Seite 16

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1011 There is an LLDP-MED device connected to the port.To set the priority value to be advertised for tagge

Seite 17

Chapter 66: Voice VLAN Commands1012accept packet):awplus> enableawplus# configure terminalawplus(config)# interface port1.0.1awplus(config-if)# swi

Seite 18

1013Section IXPort SecurityThis section contains the following chapters: Chapter 67, “MAC Address-based Port Security” on page 1015 Chapter 68, “MAC

Seite 20

1015Chapter 67MAC Address-based Port SecurityThis chapter contains the following topics: “Overview” on page 1016 “Configuring Ports” on page 1018 “

Seite 21

Chapter 67: MAC Address-based Port Security1016OverviewThis feature lets you control access to the ports on the switch based on the source MAC address

Seite 22

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1017after learning three addresses. The switch also sends an SNMP trap.Guidelines Here are the guidelines to

Seite 23

Chapter 67: MAC Address-based Port Security1018Configuring PortsThere are three things you need to decide before you configure MAC address-based port

Seite 24

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1019awplus> enableawplus# configure terminalawplus(config)# interface port1.0.4,port1.0.5awplus(config-if

Seite 25

Chapter 4: Basic Command Line Management Commands102ENDSyntaxendParametersNoneModeAll modes below the Global Configuration mode.DescriptionUse this co

Seite 26

Chapter 67: MAC Address-based Port Security1020Enabling MAC Address-based Security on PortsAfter you have configured a port for MAC address-based secu

Seite 27

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1021Disabling MAC Address-based Security on PortsTo remove MAC address-based security from ports, use the NO

Seite 28

Chapter 67: MAC Address-based Port Security1022Displaying Port SettingsThere are two commands that display information about the MAC address-based por

Seite 29

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1023Figure 180 is an example of the information.Figure 180. Example of SHOW PORT-SECURITY INTRUSION INTERFAC

Seite 30

Chapter 67: MAC Address-based Port Security1024

Seite 31

1025Chapter 68MAC Address-based Port Security CommandsThe MAC address-based port security commands are summarized in Table 108 and described in detail

Seite 32

Chapter 68: MAC Address-based Port Security Commands1026NO SWITCHPORT PORT-SECURITYSyntaxno switchport port-securityParametersNoneModePort Interface m

Seite 33

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1027NO SWITCHPORT PORT-SECURITY AGINGSyntaxno switchport port-security agingParametersNoneModePort Interface

Seite 34

Chapter 68: MAC Address-based Port Security Commands1028SHOW PORT-SECURITY INTERFACESyntaxshow port-security interface portParametersportSpecifies the

Seite 35

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1029Port Status The status of the port. The status can be Enabled or Disabled. A port that has a status of E

Seite 36

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide103EXITSyntaxexitParametersNoneModeAll modesDescriptionUse this command to move down one mode in the mode hi

Seite 37

Chapter 68: MAC Address-based Port Security Commands1030ExampleThis example displays the port security settings for ports 5 to 8:awplus# show port-sec

Seite 38

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1031SHOW PORT-SECURITY INTRUSION INTERFACESyntaxshow port-security intrusion interface portParameterportSpec

Seite 39

Chapter 68: MAC Address-based Port Security Commands1032Figure 183. Example of SHOW PORT-SECURITY INTRUSION INTERFACE CommandPort Security Intrusion L

Seite 40

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1033SWITCHPORT PORT-SECURITYSyntaxswitchport port-securityParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUs

Seite 41

Chapter 68: MAC Address-based Port Security Commands1034SWITCHPORT PORT-SECURITY AGINGSyntaxswitchport port-security agingParametersNoneModePort Inter

Seite 42

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1035SWITCHPORT PORT-SECURITY MAXIMUMSyntaxswitchport port-security maximum valueParametersvalueSpecifies the

Seite 43

Chapter 68: MAC Address-based Port Security Commands1036SWITCHPORT PORT-SECURITY VIOLATIONSyntaxswitchport port-security violation protect|restrict|sh

Seite 44

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1037This example sets the intrusion action for ports 22 to 24 to restrict. After learning their maximum numb

Seite 45

Chapter 68: MAC Address-based Port Security Commands1038

Seite 46 - Document Conventions

1039Chapter 69802.1x Port-based Network Access ControlThis chapter contains the following topics: “Overview” on page 1040 “Authentication Process” o

Seite 47

Chapter 4: Basic Command Line Management Commands104LENGTHSyntaxlength valueParametersvalueSpecifies the maximum number of lines that the SHOW command

Seite 48 - Contacting Allied Telesis

Chapter 69: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control1040OverviewThis chapter explains 802.1x port-based network access control. This port security fea

Seite 49 - Getting Started

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1041Authentication ProcessBelow is a brief overview of the authentication process that occurs between a supp

Seite 50

Chapter 69: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control1042Port RolesPart of the task to implementing this feature is specifying the roles of the ports o

Seite 51 - Interface

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1043Figure 184. Example of the Supplicant Role

Seite 52 - Management Sessions

Chapter 69: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control1044Authentication Methods for Authenticator PortsAuthenticator ports support two authentication m

Seite 53 - Web Browser Windows

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1045Operational Settings for Authenticator PortsAn authenticator port can have one of three possible operati

Seite 54

Chapter 69: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control1046Operating Modes for Authenticator PortsAuthenticator ports have three modes: Single-host mode

Seite 55 - Management Interfaces

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1047Note, however, that should the supplicant who performed the initial logon fail to periodically reauthent

Seite 56 - Local Manager Account

Chapter 69: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control1048Multi-SupplicantModeThis mode authenticates all the supplicants on an authenticator port. This

Seite 57 - AlliedWare Plus Command Modes

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1049Figure 187. Multi-Supplicant Mode

Seite 58

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide105This example returns the number of lines to the default setting for local management sessions:awplus>

Seite 59

Chapter 69: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control1050Supplicant and VLAN AssociationsOne of the challenges to managing a network is accommodating e

Seite 60 - Moving Down the Hierarchy

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1051Single-Host Mode Here are the operating characteristics for the switch when an authenticator port is set

Seite 61

Chapter 69: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control1052Enabled for multi dynamic VLAN creation - AUTH DYNAMIC-VLAN-CREATION MULTIIf dynamic VLAN crea

Seite 62

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1053Guest VLANAn authenticator port in the unauthorized state typically accepts and transmits only 802.1x pa

Seite 63

Chapter 69: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control1054GuidelinesHere are the general guidelines to this feature: Ports operating under port-based a

Seite 64

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1055 You cannot change the untagged VLAN assignment of a port after it has been designated as an authentica

Seite 65 - Moving Up the Hierarchy

Chapter 69: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control1056Enabling 802.1x Port-Based Network Access Control on the SwitchTo activate 802.1x Port-based N

Seite 66 - DISABLE command

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1057Configuring Authenticator PortsDesignatingAuthenticatorPortsYou have to designate ports as authenticator

Seite 67 - Port Numbers in Commands

Chapter 69: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control1058awplus> enableawplus# configure terminalawplus(config)# interface port1.0.12awplus(config-i

Seite 68

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1059This example configures port 1.0.8 to use the multi-host mode so that it forwards traffic from all suppl

Seite 69 - Command Format

Chapter 4: Basic Command Line Management Commands106LOGOUTSyntaxlogoutParametersNoneModeUser Exec and Privileged Exec modesDescriptionUse this command

Seite 70 - Startup Messages

Chapter 69: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control1060Configuring ReauthenticationTable 110 lists the commands in the Port Interface mode for config

Seite 71

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1061Removing Ports from the Authenticator RoleTo remove ports from the authenticator role so that they forwa

Seite 72

Chapter 69: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control1062Configuring Supplicant PortsThis section reviews the commands for configuring supplicant ports

Seite 73 - Starting a Management Session

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1063NotePorts have to be set to the supplicant mode with the DOT1X PORT-CONTROL SUPPLICANT command before yo

Seite 74

Chapter 69: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control1064NoteThe management software does not have a separate SHOW command for displaying the settings

Seite 75

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1065Disabling 802.1x Port-Based Network Access Control on the SwitchTo disable 802.1x port-based network acc

Seite 76

Chapter 69: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control1066Displaying Authenticator PortsTo view the settings of authenticator ports on the switch, use t

Seite 77

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1067Displaying EAP Packet StatisticsTo display EAP packet statistics of authenticator ports, use the SHOW DO

Seite 78 - What to Configure First

Chapter 69: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control1068

Seite 79 - Assigning a Name

1069Chapter 70802.1x Port-based Network Access Control CommandsThe 802.1x port-based network access control commands are summarized in Table 113 and d

Seite 80 - Management IP

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide107QUITSyntaxquitParametersNoneModeAll modes except the User Exec and Privileged Exec modes.DescriptionUse t

Seite 81

Chapter 70: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control Commands1070“AUTH-MAC REAUTH-RELEARNING” on page 1085Port Interface Sets the MAC address learning

Seite 82 - Saving Your

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1071“DOT1X SUPPLICANT-PARAMS MAX-START” on page 1098Port Interface Specifies the maximum number of times a s

Seite 83 - Ending a Management Session

Chapter 70: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control Commands1072“SHOW DOT1X” on page 1113 Privileged Exec Displays whether 802.1x port-based network

Seite 84

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1073AAA AUTHENTICATION DOT1X DEFAULT GROUP RADIUSSyntaxaaa authentication dot1x default group radiusParamete

Seite 85 - Basic Command Line Management

Chapter 70: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control Commands1074AUTH DYNAMIC-VLAN-CREATIONSyntaxauth dynamic-vlan-creation single| multiParameterssin

Seite 86 - Clearing the Screen

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1075This example activates multiple dynamic VLAN assignment on authenticator port 1.0.4.awplus> enableawp

Seite 87 - Displaying the On-line Help

Chapter 70: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control Commands1076AUTH GUEST-VLANSyntaxauth guest-vlan vidParametersvidSpecifies the ID number of a VLA

Seite 88

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1077AUTH HOST-MODESyntaxauth host-mode single-host| multi-host| multi-supplicantParameterssingle-hostSpecifi

Seite 89

Chapter 70: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control Commands1078This example configures authenticator port 1.0.8 to the multi-host operating mode, so

Seite 90

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1079AUTH REAUTHENTICATIONSyntaxauth reauthenticationParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse this

Seite 91

Chapter 4: Basic Command Line Management Commands108WRITESyntaxwriteParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to update the ac

Seite 92

Chapter 70: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control Commands1080AUTH TIMEOUT QUIET-PERIODSyntaxauth timeout quiet-period valueParametersquiet-periodS

Seite 93 - ? (Question Mark Key)

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1081AUTH TIMEOUT REAUTH-PERIODSyntaxauth timeout reauth-period valueParametersreauth-periodSpecifies the tim

Seite 94

Chapter 70: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control Commands1082AUTH TIMEOUT SERVER-TIMEOUTSyntaxauth timeout server-timeout valueParametersserver-ti

Seite 95 - CLEAR SCREEN

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1083AUTH TIMEOUT SUPP-TIMEOUTSyntaxauth timeout supp-timeout valueParameterssupp-timeoutSets the switch-to-s

Seite 96 - CONFIGURE TERMINAL

Chapter 70: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control Commands1084AUTH-MAC ENABLESyntaxauth-mac enableParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionU

Seite 97

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1085AUTH-MAC REAUTH-RELEARNINGSyntaxauth-mac reauth-relearningParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescripti

Seite 98

Chapter 70: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control Commands1086DOT1X CONTROL-DIRECTIONSyntaxdot1x control-direction in|bothParametersinDiscard recei

Seite 99

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1087awplus> enableawplus# configure terminalawplus(config)# interface port1.0.2awplus(config-if)# dot1x c

Seite 100 - Examples

Chapter 70: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control Commands1088DOT1X EAPSyntaxdot1x eap discard|forward|forward-untagged-vlan|forward-vlanParameters

Seite 101 - Description

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1089This example configures the switch to discard all EAP packets when 802.1x authentication is disabled:awp

Seite 102

109Chapter 5Temperature and Fan Control Overview “Overview” on page 110 “Displaying the System Environmental Status” on page 111 “Controlling Eco-M

Seite 103

Chapter 70: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control Commands1090DOT1X INITIALIZE INTERFACESyntaxdot1x initialize interface portParametersportSpecifie

Seite 104

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1091DOT1X MAX-REAUTH-REQSyntaxdot1x max-reauth-req valueParametersmax-reauth-reqSpecifies the maximum number

Seite 105

Chapter 70: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control Commands1092DOT1X PORT-CONTROL AUTOSyntaxdot1x port-control autoParametersNoneModePort Interface

Seite 106

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1093DOT1X PORT-CONTROL FORCE-AUTHORIZEDSyntaxdot1x port-control force-authorizedParametersNoneModePort Inter

Seite 107

Chapter 70: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control Commands1094DOT1X PORT-CONTROL FORCE-UNAUTHORIZEDSyntaxdot1x port-control force-unauthorizedParam

Seite 108

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1095DOT1X PORT-CONTROL SUPPLICANTSyntaxdot1x port-control supplicantParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDes

Seite 109 - Chapter 5

Chapter 70: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control Commands1096DOT1X SUPPLICANT-PARAMS AUTH-PERIODSyntaxdot1x supplicant-params auth-period valuePar

Seite 110

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1097DOT1X SUPPLICANT-PARAMS HELD-PERIODSyntaxdot1x supplicant-params held-period valueParametersvalueSpecifi

Seite 111

Chapter 70: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control Commands1098DOT1X SUPPLICANT-PARAMS MAX-STARTSyntaxdot1x supplicant-params max-start valueParamet

Seite 112 - Controlling Eco-Mode LED

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1099DOT1X SUPPLICANT-PARAMS PASSWORDSyntaxdot1x supplicant-params password valueParametersvalueAssigns passw

Seite 113 - Temperature and Fan Control

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide11SHOW ESTACK...

Seite 114 - ECOFRIENDLY LED

Chapter 5: Temperature and Fan Control Overview110OverviewThe switch monitors the environmental status, such as temperature and voltage, and the statu

Seite 115 - NO ECOFRIENDLY LED

Chapter 70: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control Commands1100DOT1X SUPPLICANT-PARAMS USERNAMESyntaxdot1x supplicant-params username usernameParame

Seite 116 - SHOW ECOFRIENDLY

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1101DOT1X TIMEOUT TX-PERIODSyntaxdot1x timeout tx-period valueParametersvalueSets the number of seconds an a

Seite 117 - SHOW SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT

Chapter 70: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control Commands1102NO AAA AUTHENTICATION DOT1X DEFAULT GROUP RADIUSSyntaxno aaa authentication dot1x def

Seite 118 - Parameter Description

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1103NO AUTH DYNAMIC-VLAN-CREATIONSyntaxno auth dynamic-vlan-creationParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDes

Seite 119 - Basic Operations

Chapter 70: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control Commands1104NO AUTH GUEST-VLANSyntaxno auth guest-vlanParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescri

Seite 120

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1105NO AUTH REAUTHENTICATIONSyntaxno auth reauthenticationParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUs

Seite 121 - Basic Switch Management

Chapter 70: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control Commands1106NO AUTH-MAC ENABLESyntaxno auth-mac enableParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescri

Seite 122 - Adding a Name to the Switch

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1107NO DOT1X PORT-CONTROLSyntaxno dot1x port-controlParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse this

Seite 123 -  Contact: JordanB

Chapter 70: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control Commands1108NO DOT1X PORT-CONTROL SUPPLICANTSyntaxno dot1x port-control supplicantParametersNoneM

Seite 124 - Displaying Parameter Settings

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1109SHOW AUTH-MAC INTERFACESyntaxshow auth-mac interface portParametersportSpecifies a port. You can display

Seite 125

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide111Displaying the System Environmental StatusThe switch monitors the environmental status of the switch and

Seite 126 - Pinging Network Devices

Chapter 70: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control Commands1110SHOW AUTH-MAC SESSIONSTATISTICS INTERFACESyntaxshow auth-mac sessionstatistics interf

Seite 127 - Resetting the Switch

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1111SHOW AUTH-MAC STATISTICS INTERFACESyntaxshow auth-mac statistics interface portParametersportSpecifies a

Seite 128

Chapter 70: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control Commands1112SHOW AUTH-MAC SUPPLICANT INTERFACESyntaxshow auth-mac supplicant interface portParame

Seite 129 - filename2

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1113SHOW DOT1XSyntaxshow dot1xParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to display w

Seite 130

Chapter 70: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control Commands1114SHOW DOT1X INTERFACESyntaxshow dot1x interface portParametersportSpecifies a port. Yo

Seite 131 - “SHOW BAUD-RATE” on page 164

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1115SHOW DOT1X STATISTICS INTERFACESyntaxshow dot1x statistics interface portParametersportSpecifies a port.

Seite 132

Chapter 70: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control Commands1116SHOW DOT1X SUPPLICANT INTERFACESyntaxshow dot1x supplicant interface port [brief]Para

Seite 133

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1117ExampleThis example displays the supplicant state of the authentication mode on ports 1.0.21 to 1.0.23:a

Seite 134

Chapter 70: 802.1x Port-based Network Access Control Commands1118

Seite 135 - Configuring the Banners

1119Section XSimple Network Management ProtocolsThis section contains the following chapters: Chapter 71, “SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c” on page 1121 Chapter

Seite 136

Chapter 5: Temperature and Fan Control Overview112Controlling Eco-Mode LEDAlliedWare Plus products provide an Eco-Mode LED control to conserve additio

Seite 138

1121Chapter 71SNMPv1 and SNMPv2cThis chapter contains the following topics: “Overview” on page 1122 “Enabling SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c” on page 1124 “Cre

Seite 139 - Chapter 8

Chapter 71: SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c1122OverviewThe Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is another way for you to monitor and configure the switch. Th

Seite 140

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1123To configure the switch to send trap or inform messages, you have to add to one or more of the community

Seite 141 - BANNER EXEC

Chapter 71: SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c1124Enabling SNMPv1 and SNMPv2cTo enable SNMP on the switch, use the SNMP-SERVER command, found in the Global Configurat

Seite 142

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1125Creating Community StringsTo create SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c community strings, use the SNMP-SERVER COMMUNITY

Seite 143 - BANNER LOGIN

Chapter 71: SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c1126Adding or Removing IP Addresses of Trap or Inform ReceiversThe command to add IP addresses of trap or inform receive

Seite 144

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1127This example assigns the IP address 143.154.76.17 as an inform message receiver to the community string

Seite 145 - BANNER MOTD

Chapter 71: SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c1128Deleting Community StringsTo delete community strings, use the NO SNMP-SERVER COMMUNITY command. Here is the format:

Seite 146

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1129Disabling SNMPv1 and SNMPv2cTo disable SNMP on the switch, use the NO SNMP-SERVER command. You cannot re

Seite 147 - BAUD-RATE SET

113Chapter 6Temperature and Fan Control CommandsThe temperature and fan control commands are summarized in Table 6.Table 6. Temperature and Fan Contro

Seite 148 - CLOCK SET

Chapter 71: SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c1130Displaying SNMPv1 and SNMPv2cTo learn whether SNMP is enabled or disabled on the switch, go to the Privileged Exec m

Seite 149 - ERASE STARTUP-CONFIG

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1131To view the trap and inform receivers assigned to the community strings, use the SHOW RUNNING-CONFIG SNM

Seite 150 - EXEC-TIMEOUT

Chapter 71: SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c1132

Seite 151

1133Chapter 72SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c CommandsThe SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c commands are summarized in Table 114 and described in detail within the chapter.Table

Seite 152

Chapter 72: SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c Commands1134“SHOW SNMP-SERVER VIEW” on page 1147Privileged Exec Displays the SNMP views.“SNMP-SERVER” on page 1148 Glob

Seite 153 - HOSTNAME

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1135NO SNMP-SERVERSyntaxno snmp-serverParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command

Seite 154 - LINE CONSOLE

Chapter 72: SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c Commands1136NO SNMP-SERVER COMMUNITYSyntaxno snmp-server community communityParametercommunitySpecifies an SNMP communi

Seite 155 - LINE VTY

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1137NO SNMP-SERVER ENABLE TRAPSyntaxno snmp-server enable trapParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDes

Seite 156 - NO HOSTNAME

Chapter 72: SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c Commands1138NO SNMP-SERVER ENABLE TRAP AUTHSyntaxno snmp-server enable trap authParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration

Seite 157

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1139NO SNMP-SERVER HOSTSyntaxno snmp-server host ipaddress traps|informs version 1|2c community_stringParame

Seite 158

Chapter 6: Temperature and Fan Control Commands114ECOFRIENDLY LEDSyntaxecofriendly ledParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this c

Seite 159 - PING IPv6

Chapter 72: SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c Commands1140ExamplesThis example removes the IPv4 address 115.124.187.4 of a trap receiver from the private community s

Seite 160

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1141NO SNMP-SERVER VIEWSyntaxno snmp-server view viewname oidParametersviewnameSpecifies the name of the vie

Seite 161

Chapter 72: SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c Commands1142NO SNMP TRAP LINK-STATUSSyntaxno snmp trap link-statusParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse t

Seite 162 - SERVICE MAXMANAGER

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1143SHOW RUNNING-CONFIG SNMPSyntaxshow running-config snmpParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionU

Seite 163 - SHOW BANNER LOGIN

Chapter 72: SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c Commands1144SHOW SNMP-SERVERSyntaxshow snmp-serverParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to

Seite 164 - SHOW BAUD-RATE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1145SHOW SNMP-SERVER COMMUNITYSyntaxshow snmp-server communityParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescript

Seite 165 - SHOW CLOCK

Chapter 72: SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c Commands1146ExampleThis example displays the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c community strings:awplus# show snmp-server community

Seite 166 - SHOW RUNNING-CONFIG

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1147SHOW SNMP-SERVER VIEWSyntaxshow snmp-server viewParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse thi

Seite 167 - SHOW SWITCH

Chapter 72: SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c Commands1148SNMP-SERVERSyntaxsnmp-serverParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command to activ

Seite 168

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1149SNMP-SERVER COMMUNITYSyntaxsnmp-server community community rw|roParameterscommunitySpecifies a new commu

Seite 169 - SHOW SYSTEM

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide115NO ECOFRIENDLY LEDSyntaxno ecofriendly ledParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this

Seite 170 - SHOW SYSTEM SERIALNUMBER

Chapter 72: SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c Commands1150SNMP-SERVER ENABLE TRAPSyntaxsnmp-server enable trapParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionU

Seite 171 - SHOW USERS

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1151SNMP-SERVER ENABLE TRAP AUTHSyntaxsnmp-server enable trap authParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration mod

Seite 172

Chapter 72: SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c Commands1152SNMP-SERVER HOSTSyntaxsnmp-server host ipaddress traps|informs version 1|2c communityParametersipaddressSpe

Seite 173 - SHOW VERSION

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1153ExamplesThis example assigns the IPv4 address 149.44.12.44 of a trap receiver to the private community s

Seite 174 - SNMP-SERVER CONTACT

Chapter 72: SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c Commands1154SNMP-SERVER VIEWSyntaxsnmp-server view viewname oid excluded|includedParametersviewnameSpecifies the name o

Seite 175 - SNMP-SERVER LOCATION

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1155This example creates the new view “AlliedTelesis” that limits the available MIB objects to those in the

Seite 176 - SYSTEM TERRITORY

Chapter 72: SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c Commands1156SNMP TRAP LINK-STATUSSyntaxsnmp trap link-statusParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse this co

Seite 177

1157Chapter 73SNMPv3 CommandsThe SNMPv3 commands are summarized in Table 117 and described in detail within the chapter.Table 117. SNMPv3 CommandsComm

Seite 178

Chapter 73: SNMPv3 Commands1158“SNMP-SERVER GROUP” on page 1173Global ConfigurationCreates SNMPv3 groups.“SNMP-SERVER HOST” on page 1175Global Configu

Seite 179 - Port Parameters

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1159NO SNMP-SERVERSyntaxno snmp-serverParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command

Seite 180 - Adding Descriptions

Chapter 6: Temperature and Fan Control Commands116SHOW ECOFRIENDLYSyntaxshow ecofriendlyParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this comm

Seite 181

Chapter 73: SNMPv3 Commands1160NO SNMP-SERVER ENGINEID LOCALSyntaxno snmp-server engineid localParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionU

Seite 182 - Chapter 9: Port Parameters

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1161NO SNMP-SERVER GROUPSyntaxno snmp-server group name noauth|auth|privParametersnameSpecifies the name of

Seite 183

Chapter 73: SNMPv3 Commands1162NO SNMP-SERVER HOSTSyntaxno snmp-server host ipaddress informs|traps v3 auth|noauth|priv usernameParametersipaddressSpe

Seite 184 - Enabling or Disabling Ports

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1163ExampleThis example deletes the host entry with the IPv4 address 187.87.165.12. The user name associated

Seite 185

Chapter 73: SNMPv3 Commands1164NO SNMP-SERVER USERSyntaxno snmp-server user userParametersuserSpecifies the name of a user you want to delete from the

Seite 186

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1165NO SNMP-SERVER VIEWSyntaxno snmp-server view view OIDParametersviewSpecifies the name of a view to be de

Seite 187

Chapter 73: SNMPv3 Commands1166SHOW SNMP-SERVERSyntaxshow snmp-serverParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to display the

Seite 188

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1167SHOW SNMP-SERVER GROUPSyntaxshow snmp-server groupParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse t

Seite 189 - Resetting Ports

Chapter 73: SNMPv3 Commands1168SHOW SNMP-SERVER HOSTSyntaxshow snmp-server hostParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to di

Seite 190

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1169SHOW SNMP-SERVER USERSyntaxshow snmp-server userParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse thi

Seite 191

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide117SHOW SYSTEM ENVIRONMENTSyntaxshow system environmentParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse

Seite 192

Chapter 73: SNMPv3 Commands1170SHOW SNMP-SERVER VIEWSyntaxshow snmp-server viewParameterNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to dis

Seite 193

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1171SNMP-SERVERSyntaxsnmp-serverParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command to ac

Seite 194

Chapter 73: SNMPv3 Commands1172SNMP-SERVER ENGINEID LOCALSyntaxsnmp-server engineid local engine-id|defaultParametersengine-idSpecifies the SNMPv3 eng

Seite 195

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1173SNMP-SERVER GROUPSyntaxsnmp-server group name auth|noauth|priv read readview|write writeviewParametersna

Seite 196 - Displaying Port

Chapter 73: SNMPv3 Commands1174ExamplesThis example creates a group called “sta5west” with a minimum security level of privacy. The group has a read v

Seite 197

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1175SNMP-SERVER HOSTSyntaxsnmp-server host ipaddress informs|traps version 3 auth|noauth|priv usernameParame

Seite 198 - Displaying SFP Information

Chapter 73: SNMPv3 Commands1176ExampleThis example configures SNMPv3 to send trap messages to an end node with the IPv4 address 149.157.192.12. The us

Seite 199 - Port Parameter Commands

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1177SNMP-SERVER USERSyntaxsnmp-server user username groupname [auth sha|md5 auth_password] [priv des priv_pa

Seite 200

Chapter 73: SNMPv3 Commands1178 To create a user that has authentication but not privacy, include the AUTH keyword but not the PRIV keyword. To crea

Seite 201 - Command Mode Description

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1179SNMP-SERVER VIEWSyntaxsnmp-server view viewname oid excluded|includedParametersviewnameSpecifies the nam

Seite 202 - BACKPRESSURE

Chapter 6: Temperature and Fan Control Commands118ExampleThe following example displays environmental information for the switch:awplus# show system e

Seite 203

Chapter 73: SNMPv3 Commands1180This example creates the new view “AlliedTelesis” that limits the available MIB objects to those in the OID 1.3.6.1.4.1

Seite 204

1181Section XINetwork ManagementThis section contains the following chapters: Chapter 74, “sFlow Agent” on page 1183 Chapter 75, “sFlow Agent Comman

Seite 206 - DESCRIPTION

1183Chapter 74sFlow AgentThis chapter contains the following topics: “Overview” on page 1184 “Configuring the sFlow Agent” on page 1186 “Configurin

Seite 207

Chapter 74: sFlow Agent1184OverviewThe sFlow agent allows the switch to gather data about the traffic on the ports and to send the data to an sFlow co

Seite 208

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1185 Number of ingress and egress packets with errors Number of ingress packets with unknown protocolsTo c

Seite 209

Chapter 74: sFlow Agent1186Configuring the sFlow AgentThe command for defining the IP address of the sFlow collector is the SFLOW COLLECTOR IP command

Seite 210 - EGRESS-RATE-LIMIT

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1187Configuring the PortsTo configure the ports so that their performance data is collected by the sFlow age

Seite 211 - FCTRLLIMIT

Chapter 74: sFlow Agent1188Configuring thePolling IntervalThe polling interval determines how frequently the agent queries the packet counters of the

Seite 212 - FLOWCONTROL

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1189Enabling the sFlow AgentUse the SFLOW ENABLE command in the Global Configuration mode to activate the sF

Seite 213

119Section IIBasic OperationsThis section contains the following chapters: Chapter 7, “Basic Switch Management” on page 121 Chapter 8, “Basic Switch

Seite 214

Chapter 74: sFlow Agent1190Disabling the sFlow AgentTo stop the sFlow agent from collecting performance data on the ports on the switch and from sendi

Seite 215 - HOLBPLIMIT

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1191Displaying the sFlow AgentTo view the IP addresses and UDP port settings of the collectors as defined in

Seite 216

Chapter 74: sFlow Agent1192Configuration ExampleHere is an example of how to configure the sFlow agent. The IP address of the sFlow collector is 152.2

Seite 217 - NO EGRESS-RATE-LIMIT

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1193This last command activates the sFlow agent on the switch.Depending on the amount of traffic on the port

Seite 218 - NO FLOWCONTROL

Chapter 74: sFlow Agent1194

Seite 219 - NO SHUTDOWN

1195Chapter 75sFlow Agent CommandsThe sFlow agent commands are summarized in Table 118 and described in detail within the chapter.Table 118. sFlow Age

Seite 220

Chapter 75: sFlow Agent Commands1196NO SFLOW COLLECTOR IPSyntaxno sflow collector ip ipaddressParametersipaddressSpecifies the IP address of an sFlow

Seite 221 - NO STORM-CONTROL

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1197NO SFLOW ENABLESyntaxno sflow enableParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this comma

Seite 222 - POLARITY

Chapter 75: sFlow Agent Commands1198SFLOW COLLECTOR IPSyntaxsflow collector ip ipaddress [port udp_port]ParametersipaddressSpecifies the IP address of

Seite 223

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1199SFLOW ENABLESyntaxsflow enableParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command to

Seite 224

Contents12SERVICE DHCP-RELAY...

Seite 226

Chapter 75: sFlow Agent Commands1200SFLOW POLLING-INTERVALSyntaxsflow polling-interval polling-intervalParameterspolling-intervalSpecifies the maximum

Seite 227 - SHOW FLOWCONTROL INTERFACE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1201This example removes sFlow monitoring on port 21 using the NO form of the command:awplus> enableawplu

Seite 228

Chapter 75: sFlow Agent Commands1202SFLOW SAMPLING-RATESyntaxsflow sampling-rate sampling-rateParameterssampling-rateSpecifies the sampling rate on a

Seite 229 - SHOW INTERFACE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1203This example disables packet sampling on port 7:awplus> enableawplus# configure terminalawplus(config

Seite 230 - Interface Port number

Chapter 75: sFlow Agent Commands1204SHOW SFLOWSyntaxshow sflow [database]ParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to display

Seite 231

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1205The fields are described in Table 119.Table 119. SHOW SFLOW CommandParameter DescriptionNumber of Collec

Seite 232

Chapter 75: sFlow Agent Commands1206ExampleThis example displays the settings of the sFlow agent:awplus> enableawplus# show sflow

Seite 233 - SHOW INTERFACE BRIEF

1207Chapter 76LLDP and LLDP-MEDThis chapter contains the following topics “Overview” on page 1208 “Enabling LLDP and LLDP-MED on the Switch” on page

Seite 234

Chapter 76: LLDP and LLDP-MED1208OverviewLink Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) and Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED)

Seite 235 - SHOW INTERFACE STATUS

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1209MandatoryLLDP TLVsMandatory LLDP TLVs are sent by default on ports that send TLVs. The TLVs are defined

Seite 236

121Chapter 7Basic Switch ManagementThis chapter contains the following: “Adding a Name to the Switch” on page 122 “Adding Contact and Location Infor

Seite 237

Chapter 76: LLDP and LLDP-MED1210System capabilities The device’s router and bridge functions, and whether or not these functions are currently enable

Seite 238

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1211The switch does not verify whether a device connected to a port is LLDP-compatible prior to sending mand

Seite 239

Chapter 76: LLDP and LLDP-MED1212Location Location information configured for the port, in one or more of the following formats: Civic location Coor

Seite 240 - SHOW RUNNING-CONFIG INTERFACE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1213Enabling LLDP and LLDP-MED on the SwitchTo enable LLDP and LLDP-MED on the switch, use the LLDP RUN comm

Seite 241 - SHOW STORM-CONTROL

Chapter 76: LLDP and LLDP-MED1214Configuring Ports to Only Receive LLDP and LLDP-MED TLVsThis is the first in a series of examples that show how to co

Seite 242

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1215Configuring Ports to Send Only Mandatory LLDP TLVsThis example illustrates how to configure the ports to

Seite 243 - SHOW SYSTEM PLUGGABLE

Chapter 76: LLDP and LLDP-MED1216Configuring Ports to Send Optional LLDP TLVsThis example illustrates how to configure the ports to send optional LLDP

Seite 244 - SHOW SYSTEM PLUGGABLE DETAIL

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1217Here are the commands to configure the ports to send the TLVs:awplus> enableEnter the Privileged Exec

Seite 245 - SHUTDOWN

Chapter 76: LLDP and LLDP-MED1218Configuring Ports to Send Optional LLDP-MED TLVsThis section explains how to configure the ports to send these option

Seite 246

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1219awplus# show lldp interface port1.0.3,port1.0.4Use the SHOW LLDP INTERFACE command to confirm the config

Seite 247

Chapter 7: Basic Switch Management122Adding a Name to the SwitchThe switch will be easier to identify if you assign it a name. The switch displays its

Seite 248

Chapter 76: LLDP and LLDP-MED1220Configuring Ports to Send LLDP-MED Civic Location TLVsCivic location TLVs specify the physical addresses of network d

Seite 249 - STORM-CONTROL

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide12213. Move to the Port Interface mode of the ports to which the entry is to be assigned. (A civic location

Seite 250

Chapter 76: LLDP and LLDP-MED1222This series of commands adds the new location entry to port 14 and configures the port to include the location TLV in

Seite 251 - Power Over Ethernet

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1223Configuring Ports to Send LLDP-MED Coordinate Location TLVsCoordinate location TLVs specify the location

Seite 252

Chapter 76: LLDP and LLDP-MED12243. Move to the Port Interface mode of the ports to which the entry is to be assigned. (A coordinate location entry ca

Seite 253 - Prioritization

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1225This series of commands adds the entry to port 15 and configures the port to include the TLV in its adve

Seite 254 - Enabling and Disabling PoE

Chapter 76: LLDP and LLDP-MED1226awplus# show location coord-location interface port1.0.15Use the SHOW LOCATION command to confirm the configuration.a

Seite 255

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1227Configuring Ports to Send LLDP-MED ELIN Location TLVsThis type of TLV specifies the location of a networ

Seite 256

Chapter 76: LLDP and LLDP-MED1228This series of commands adds the entry to port 5 and configures the port to include the TLV in its advertisements:awp

Seite 257 - Prioritizing Ports

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1229Removing LLDP TLVs from PortsTo stop ports from sending optional LLDP TLVs, use this command:no lldp tlv

Seite 258

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide123Adding Contact and Location InformationThe commands for assigning the switch contact and location informa

Seite 259 - Managing Legacy PDs

Chapter 76: LLDP and LLDP-MED1230Removing LLDP-MED TLVs from PortsTo remove optional LLDP-MED TLVs from ports, use the NO LLDP MED-TLV-SELECT command:

Seite 260 - Monitoring Power Consumption

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1231Deleting LLDP-MED Location EntriesThe command for deleting LLDP-MED location entries from the switch is:

Seite 261 - Displaying PoE Information

Chapter 76: LLDP and LLDP-MED1232Disabling LLDP and LLDP-MED on the SwitchTo disable LLDP and LLDP-MED on the switch, use the NO LLDP RUN command in t

Seite 262

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1233Displaying General LLDP SettingsTo view the timers and other general LLDP and LLDP-MED settings, use the

Seite 263 - Power Over Ethernet Commands

Chapter 76: LLDP and LLDP-MED1234Displaying Port SettingsTo view the LLDP and LLDP-MED settings of the individual ports on the switch, use the SHOW LL

Seite 264

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1235Displaying or Clearing Neighbor InformationThere are two commands for displaying the information the swi

Seite 265

Chapter 76: LLDP and LLDP-MED1236This example clears the information the switch has received from all the neighbors:awplus> enableawplus# clear lld

Seite 266 - NO POWER-INLINE ALLOW-LEGACY

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1237Displaying Port TLVsTo view the TLVs of the individual ports on the switch, use the SHOW LLDP LOCAL-INFO

Seite 267 - NO POWER-INLINE DESCRIPTION

Chapter 76: LLDP and LLDP-MED1238Displaying and Clearing StatisticsThe switch maintains LLDP and LLDP-MED performance statistics for the the individua

Seite 268 - NO POWER-INLINE ENABLE

1239Chapter 77LLDP and LLDP-MED CommandsThe Link Layer Discovery Protocol commands are summarized in Table 126 and described in detail within the chap

Seite 269 - NO POWER-INLINE MAX

Chapter 7: Basic Switch Management124Displaying Parameter SettingsTo display the current parameter settings on the switch, use the SHOW RUNNING-CONFIG

Seite 270 - NO POWER-INLINE PRIORITY

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1240“LLDP NOTIFICATION-INTERVAL” on page 1254Global ConfigurationSets the notification interval, which is the mi

Seite 271

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1241“NO LLDP MED-TLV-SELECT” on page 1271Port Interface Stops ports from transmitting specified LLDP-MED TLV

Seite 272 - NO SERVICE POWER-INLINE

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1242CLEAR LLDP STATISTICSSyntaxclear lldp statistics [interface port]ParametersportSpecifies a port. You can spe

Seite 273

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1243CLEAR LLDP TABLESyntaxclear lldp table [interface port]ParametersportSpecifies a port. You can specify m

Seite 274 - POWER-INLINE ALLOW-LEGACY

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1244LLDP HOLDTIME-MULTIPLIERSyntaxlldp holdtime-multiplier holdtime-multiplierParametersholdtime-multiplierSpeci

Seite 275 - POWER-INLINE DESCRIPTION

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1245LLDP LOCATIONSyntaxlldp location civic-location-id|coord-location-id|elin-location-id location_idParamet

Seite 276 - POWER-INLINE ENABLE

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1246This example adds the coordinate location ID 11 to port 2:awplus> enableawplus# configure terminalawplus(

Seite 277 - POWER-INLINE MAX

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1247LLDP MANAGEMENT-ADDRESSSyntaxlldp management-address ipaddressParametersipaddressSpecifies an IP address

Seite 278 - POWER-INLINE PRIORITY

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1248ExamplesThis example configures port 2 to transmit the IP address 149.122.54.2 as its management IP address

Seite 279

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1249LLDP MED-NOTIFICATIONSSyntaxlldp med-notificationsParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse th

Seite 280 - POWER-INLINE USAGE-THRESHOLD

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide125Manually Setting the Date and TimeTo manually set the date and time on the switch, use the CLOCK SET comm

Seite 281 - SERVICE POWER-INLINE

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1250LLDP MED-TLV-SELECTSyntaxlldp med-tlv-select capabilities|network-policy|location|power-management-ext|inven

Seite 282 - SHOW POWER-INLINE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1251ExamplesThis example configures ports 3 to 8 to send the inventory management TLV to their neighbors:awp

Seite 283

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1252LLDP NON-STRICT-MED-TLV-ORDER-CHECKSyntaxlldp non-strict-med-tlv-order-checkParametersNoneModeGlobal Configu

Seite 284

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1253LLDP NOTIFICATIONSSyntaxlldp notificationsParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse this comma

Seite 285

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1254LLDP NOTIFICATION-INTERVALSyntaxlldp notification-interval intervalParametersintervalSpecifies the notificat

Seite 286

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1255LLDP REINITSyntaxlldp reinit delayParametersdelaySpecifies the re-initialization delay value. The range

Seite 287 - SHOW POWER-INLINE INTERFACE

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1256LLDP RUNSyntaxlldp runParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command to activate LLD

Seite 288

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1257LLDP TIMERSyntaxlldp timer intervalParametersintervalSpecifies the transmit interval. The range is 5 to

Seite 289

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1258LLDP TLV-SELECTSyntaxlldp tlv-select all|tlvParametersallConfigures a port to send all optional TLVs.tlvSpec

Seite 290

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1259To remove optional TLVs from ports, refer to “NO LLDP TLV-SELECT” on page 1275.Confirmation Command“SHOW

Seite 291

Chapter 7: Basic Switch Management126Pinging Network DevicesIf the switch is unable to communicate with a network device, such as a syslog server or a

Seite 292

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1260ExamplesThis example configures ports 3 to 5 to transmit all the optional LLDP TLVs:awplus> enableawplus#

Seite 293 - Chapter 13

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1261LLDP TRANSMIT RECEIVESyntaxlldp transmit receive|transmitParameterstransmitConfigures ports to send LLDP

Seite 294

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1262LLDP TX-DELAYSyntaxlldp tx-delay tx-delayParameterstx-delaySpecifies the transmission delay timer in seconds

Seite 295

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1263LOCATION CIVIC-LOCATIONSyntaxlocation civic-location identifier id_numberParametersid_numberSpecifies an

Seite 296

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1264Here are the guidelines to using the location parameters: The country parameter must be two uppercase chara

Seite 297 - Management

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1265After you create a location entry, use “LLDP LOCATION” on page 1245 to assign the location entry to a po

Seite 298

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1266LOCATION COORD-LOCATIONSyntaxlocation coordinate-location identifier id_numberParametersid_numberSpecifies a

Seite 299 - Default Gateway

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1267This command is also used to remove parameter values from existing LLDP-MED coordinate location entries.

Seite 300 - Address and

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1268ExamplesThis example creates a new coordinate location entry with these specifications.ID number: 16Latitud

Seite 301 - Displaying an

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1269LOCATION ELIN-LOCATIONSyntaxlocation elin-location elin_id identifier id_numberParameterselin_idSpecifie

Seite 302 - Adding an IPv6

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide127Resetting the SwitchTo reset the switch, use either the REBOOT or RELOAD command in the Privileged Exec m

Seite 303

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1270NO LLDP MED-NOTIFICATIONSSyntaxno lldp med-notificationsParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse

Seite 304 - Deleting an IPv6

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1271NO LLDP MED-TLV-SELECTSyntaxno lldp med-tlv-select capabilities|network-policy|location|power-management

Seite 305

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1272ExamplesThis example stops port 8 from transmitting all LLDP-MED TLVs:awplus> enableawplus# configure ter

Seite 306

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1273NO LLDP NOTIFICATIONSSyntaxno lldp notificationsParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse this

Seite 307

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1274NO LLDP RUNSyntaxno lldp runParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command to disabl

Seite 308

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1275NO LLDP TLV-SELECTSyntaxno lldp tlv-select all|tlvParametersallRemoves all optional LLDP TLVs from a por

Seite 309 - CLEAR IPV6 NEIGHBORS

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1276NO LLDP TRANSMIT RECEIVESyntaxno lldp transmit|receiveParameterstransmitStops ports from sending LLDP and LL

Seite 310

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1277NO LOCATIONSyntaxno location civic-location|coord-location|elin-location identifier id_numberParametersc

Seite 311

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1278This example removes the ELIN location IDs 3 and 4:awplus> enableawplus# configure terminalawplus(config)

Seite 312

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1279SHOW LLDPSyntaxshow lldpParametersNone.ModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to display ge

Seite 313

Chapter 7: Basic Switch Management128Restoring the Default Settings to the SwitchTo restore the default settings to the switch, delete or rename the a

Seite 314

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1280ExampleThe following example displays general LLDP settings:awplus# show lldpHold-time Multiplier The holdti

Seite 315 - 143.87.132.45:

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1281SHOW LLDP INTERFACESyntaxshow lldp interface [port]ParametersportSpecifies a port, You can specify more

Seite 316 - IPV6 ADDRESS

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1282ExamplesThis example displays the LLDP settings for all the ports on the switch:awplus# show lldp interfaceT

Seite 317

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1283SHOW LLDP LOCAL-INFO INTERFACESyntaxshow lldp local-info [interface port]ParametersportSpecifies a port,

Seite 318 - IPV6 ROUTE

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1284Figure 214. SHOW LLDP LOCAL-INFO INTERFACE Command (continued)The fields are defined in Table 131 on page 12

Seite 319 - 45ab:672:934c::78:17cb:

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1285SHOW LLDP NEIGHBORS DETAILSyntaxshow lldp neighbors detail [interface port]ParametersportSpecifies a por

Seite 320

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1286Figure 216. SHOW LLDP NEIGHBORS DETAIL Command (continued)The information is explained in Table 131.LLDP-MED

Seite 321

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1287System Capabilities (Enabled)The device’s functions, and whether or not these functions are currently en

Seite 322

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1288Network Policy The network policy information configured on the port for connected media endpoint devices. T

Seite 323 - NO IPV6 ADDRESS

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1289ExamplesThis example displays the information from all of the neighbors on the switch:awplus# show lldp

Seite 324 - NO IPV6 ROUTE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide129Another way to delete the file is with the ERASE STARTUP-CONFIG command, also in the Privileged Exec mode

Seite 325

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1290SHOW LLDP NEIGHBORS INTERFACESyntaxshow lldp neighbors interface [port]ParametersportSpecifies a port. You c

Seite 326

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1291ExamplesThis example displays a summary of the information from all the neighbors connected to the switc

Seite 327

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1292SHOW LLDP STATISTICSSyntaxshow lldp statisticsParametersNoneModeUser Exec mode and Privileged Exec modeDescr

Seite 328

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1293ExampleThe following example displays LLDP statistics for the switch:awplus# show lldp statisticsTLVs Un

Seite 329 - SHOW IPV6 INTERFACE

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1294SHOW LLDP STATISTICS INTERFACESyntaxshow lldp statistics interface [port]ParametersportSpecifies a port. You

Seite 330 - SHOW IPV6 ROUTE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1295ExamplesThis example displays the statistics for all the ports:awplus# show lldp statistics interfaceThi

Seite 331 - Chapter 15

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1296SHOW LOCATIONSyntaxshow location civic-location|coord-location|elin-location [identifier id-number|interface

Seite 332

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1297ExamplesThe following example displays all the civic location entries on the switch:awplus# show locatio

Seite 333 - SNTP Server

Chapter 77: LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands1298

Seite 334

1299Chapter 78Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)This chapter contains the following topics: “Overview” on page 1300 “Adding Static ARP Entries” on pa

Seite 335

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide13Chapter 36: File Transfer ...

Seite 336 - Disabling the SNTP Client

Chapter 7: Basic Switch Management130Setting the Baud Rate of the Console PortThe Console port is used for local management of the switch. To set its

Seite 337 - Displaying the SNTP Client

Chapter 78: Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)1300OverviewThe Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is used to associate an IPv4 address with a MAC address

Seite 338 - Displaying the Date and Time

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1301Adding Static ARP EntriesIn most cases, the ARP table can be populated dynamically; however, the switch

Seite 339 - SNTP Client Commands

Chapter 78: Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)1302Deleting Static and Dynamic ARP EntriesThe ARP cache contains two types of ARP entries: dynamic and s

Seite 340 - CLOCK SUMMER-TIME

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1303Displaying the ARP TableTo display the ARP table on the switch, use the SHOW ARP command in the User Exe

Seite 341 - CLOCK TIMEZONE

Chapter 78: Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)1304

Seite 342 - NO CLOCK SUMMER-TIME

1305Chapter 79Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) CommandsThe ARP commands are summarized in Table 137 and described in detail within the chapter.Table

Seite 343 - NO NTP PEER

Chapter 79: Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) Commands1306ARP Syntaxarp ipaddress macaddress port_numberParametersipaddressSpecifies the IP address of

Seite 344 - NTP PEER

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1307ExampleThe following example creates an ARP entry for the IP address 192.168.1.3 and the MAC address 7a:

Seite 345 - PURGE NTP

Chapter 79: Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) Commands1308CLEAR ARP-CACHESyntaxclear arp-cacheParametersNoneModesUser Exec mode and Privileged Exec mo

Seite 346

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1309NO ARP (IP ADDRESS)Syntaxno arp ipaddressParametersipaddressSpecifies the IP address of a static ARP ent

Seite 347 - SHOW NTP ASSOCIATIONS

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide131NoteThe baud rate is the only adjustable parameter on the Console port.For reference information, refer t

Seite 348

Chapter 79: Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) Commands1310SHOW ARPSyntaxshow arpParametersNoneModesUser Exec mode and Privileged Exec modeDescriptionU

Seite 349 - SHOW NTP STATUS

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1311ExampleThe following example displays the ARP entries in the ARP cache on the switch:awplus# show arpTyp

Seite 350

Chapter 79: Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) Commands1312

Seite 351 - Domain Name System (DNS)

1313Chapter 80RMONThis chapter contains the following topics: “Overview” on page 1314 “RMON Port Statistics” on page 1315 “RMON Histories” on page

Seite 352

Chapter 80: RMON1314OverviewThe RMON (Remote MONitoring) MIB is used with SNMP applications to monitor the operations of network devices. The switch s

Seite 353

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1315RMON Port StatisticsTo view port statistics using an SNMP program and the RMON section in the MIB, you m

Seite 354

Chapter 80: RMON1316awplus(config-if)# rmon collection stats 16awplus(config-if)# exitawplus(config)# interface port1.0.20awplus(config-if)# rmon coll

Seite 355

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1317RMON HistoriesRMON histories are snapshots of port statistics. They are taken by the switch at predefine

Seite 356

Chapter 80: RMON1318snapshot every minute for five minutes on a port, you specify five buckets (one bucket for each minute) and an interval of sixty s

Seite 357

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1319Here is an example of the information.Figure 224. SHOW RMON HISTORY CommandThe fields are defined in Tab

Seite 358

Chapter 7: Basic Switch Management132Configuring the Management Session TimersYou should always conclude a management session by logging off so that i

Seite 359

Chapter 80: RMON1320RMON AlarmsRMON alarms are used to generate alert messages when packet activity on designated ports rises above or falls below spe

Seite 360 - IP NAME-SERVER

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1321The following sections explain how to create and manage the various elements of an alarm: “Creating RMO

Seite 361

Chapter 80: RMON1322The owner parameter is useful in situations where more than one person is managing the switch. You can use it to identify who crea

Seite 362 - IP DOMAIN-NAME

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1323The range is 1 to 65535 seconds.The DELTA and ABSOLUTE parameters define the type of change that has to

Seite 363 - IP DOMAIN-LIST

Chapter 80: RMON1324The next series of steps creates the event, which enters a message in the event log whenever the thresholds are crossed:Here are t

Seite 364

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1325Here are the steps to creating the alarm:Creating anAlarm - Example2This example creates an alarm that m

Seite 365 - IP DOMAIN-LOOKUP

Chapter 80: RMON1326Phase 2: Adding the RMON Statistics Group to the PortThe steps here add a statistics group to port 20 so that the port statistics

Seite 366 - SHOW IP NAME-SERVER

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1327Phase 3: Creating the EventThe event in this example is to send an SNMP trap and to log a message in the

Seite 367 - SHOW IP DOMAIN-NAME

Chapter 80: RMON1328awplus# show rmon alarmUse the SHOW RMON ALARM command to verify the new alarm.

Seite 368 - SHOW HOSTS

1329Chapter 81RMON CommandsThe RMON commands are summarized in Table 140 and described in detail within the chapter.Table 140. RMON CommandsCommand Mo

Seite 369

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide133Both the first_line_id and the last_line_id parameters have value of 0 to 9. You can specify one VTY line

Seite 370

Chapter 81: RMON Commands1330“SHOW RMON HISTORY” on page 1350Privileged Exec Displays the RMON history groups that are assigned to the ports on the sw

Seite 371

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1331NO RMON ALARMSyntaxno rmon alarm alarm_idParametersalarm_idSpecifies the ID number of the alarm you want

Seite 372 - Adding Static MAC Addresses

Chapter 81: RMON Commands1332NO RMON COLLECTION HISTORYSyntaxno rmon collection history collection_idParameterscollection_idSpecifies the ID number of

Seite 373

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1333NO RMON COLLECTION STATSSyntaxno rmon collection stats stats_idParametersstats_idSpecifies the ID number

Seite 374 - Deleting MAC Addresses

Chapter 81: RMON Commands1334NO RMON EVENTSyntaxno rmon event event_idParametersevent_idSpecifies the ID number of the event you want to delete from t

Seite 375

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1335RMON ALARMSyntaxrmon alarm alarm_id oid.stats_id interval interval delta|absolute rising-threshold risin

Seite 376 - Setting the Aging Timer

Chapter 81: RMON Commands1336rising_event_idSpecifies the ID number of the event the switch is to perform when the falling threshold is crossed. The e

Seite 377

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1337Confirmation Command“SHOW RMON ALARM” on page 1346ExampleThis example creates an RMON alarm that monitor

Seite 378 - Chapter 19: MAC Address Table

Chapter 81: RMON Commands1338RMON COLLECTION HISTORYSyntaxrmon collection history history_id [buckets buckets] [interval interval] [owner owner]Parame

Seite 379 - MAC Address Table Commands

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1339RMON statistics histories are only viewable from an SNMP application program. There are no commands in t

Seite 380 - CLEAR MAC ADDRESS-TABLE

Chapter 7: Basic Switch Management134Setting the Maximum Number of Manager SessionsThe switch supports up to three manager sessions simultaneously so

Seite 381

Chapter 81: RMON Commands1340RMON COLLECTION STATSSyntaxrmon collection stats stats_id [owner owner]Parametersstats_idSpecifies the ID number of a new

Seite 382 - MAC ADDRESS-TABLE AGEING-TIME

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1341RMON EVENT LOGSyntaxrmon event event_id log description description [owner owner]Parametersevent_idSpeci

Seite 383

Chapter 81: RMON Commands1342RMON EVENT LOG TRAPSyntaxrmon event event_id log trap community_string [description description] [owner owner]Parameterse

Seite 384 - MAC ADDRESS-TABLE STATIC

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1343ExampleThis example creates an event for RMON alarms with an ID of 2, a community string of “station43a,

Seite 385

Chapter 81: RMON Commands1344RMON EVENT TRAPSyntaxrmon event event_id trap community_string [description description] [owner owner]Parametersevent_idS

Seite 386 - NO MAC ADDRESS-TABLE STATIC

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1345ExampleThe following example creates an event with an ID of 4, a community string of “st_west8,” and a d

Seite 387

Chapter 81: RMON Commands1346SHOW RMON ALARMSyntaxshow rmon alarmParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to display the RMON

Seite 388 - SHOW MAC ADDRESS-TABLE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1347The fields are described in Table 142.ExampleThe following example displays the RMON alarms on the switc

Seite 389

Chapter 81: RMON Commands1348SHOW RMON EVENTSyntaxshow rmon eventParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to display the RMON

Seite 390

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1349ExampleThe following example displays the RMON events on the switch:awplus# show rmon eventEvent type (c

Seite 391

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide135Configuring the BannersThe switch has banner messages you may use to identify the switch or to display ot

Seite 392

Chapter 81: RMON Commands1350SHOW RMON HISTORYSyntaxshow rmon historyParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to display the

Seite 393

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1351ExampleThe following example displays the history groups that are assigned to the ports on the switch:aw

Seite 394 - Chapter 21: Enhanced Stacking

Chapter 81: RMON Commands1352SHOW RMON STATISTICSSyntaxshow rmon statisticsParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to displa

Seite 395

1353Section XIIManagement SecurityThis section contains the following chapters: Chapter 82, “Local Manager Accounts” on page 1355 Chapter 83, “Local

Seite 397 - Save the configuration

1355Chapter 82Local Manager AccountsThis chapter provides the following topics: “Overview” on page 1356 “Creating Local Manager Accounts” on page 13

Seite 398 - Configuring a Member Switch

Chapter 82: Local Manager Accounts1356OverviewEach AT-FS970M Series switch is pre-configured at the factory with one default manager account. The fact

Seite 399

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1357Figure 229. Password Prompt for Command Mode RestrictionIf the manager enters the correct password, the

Seite 400

Chapter 82: Local Manager Accounts1358Password encryption is activated with the SERVICE PASSWORD-ENCRYPTION command and deactivated with the NO SERVIC

Seite 401

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1359Creating Local Manager AccountsThe command for creating local manager accounts is the USERNAME command i

Seite 402

Chapter 7: Basic Switch Management136The commands for setting the banners are located in the Global Configuration mode with the exception of the SHOW

Seite 403

Chapter 82: Local Manager Accounts1360Passwords entered in encrypted form remain encrypted in the running configuration even if you disable password e

Seite 404 - Member Switches

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1361Deleting Local Manager AccountsTo delete local manager accounts from the switch, use the NO USERNAME com

Seite 405

Chapter 82: Local Manager Accounts1362Activating Command Mode Restriction and Creating the Special PasswordCommand mode restriction is a security feat

Seite 406

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1363Deactivating Command Mode Restriction and Deleting the Special PasswordThe command for deactivating comm

Seite 407

Chapter 82: Local Manager Accounts1364Activating or Deactivating Password EncryptionPassword encryption controls the manner in which the switch stores

Seite 408

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1365Displaying the Local Manager AccountsTo view the local accounts on the switch, use “SHOW RUNNING-CONFIG”

Seite 409

Chapter 82: Local Manager Accounts1366

Seite 410

1367Chapter 83Local Manager Account CommandsThe local manager account commands are summarized in Table 146 and described in detail within the chapter.

Seite 411

Chapter 83: Local Manager Account Commands1368ENABLE PASSWORDSyntaxenable password [8] passwordParameters8Specifies that the password is encrypted.pas

Seite 412

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1369awplus> enableawplus# configure terminalawplus(config)# enable password 8 1255bbf963118fcf750aca356d3

Seite 413 - Disabling Enhanced Stacking

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide137To remove messages without assigning new messages, use the NO versions of the commands. This example remo

Seite 414

Chapter 83: Local Manager Account Commands1370NO ENABLE PASSWORDSyntaxno enable passwordParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this

Seite 415 - Enhanced Stacking Commands

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1371NO SERVICE PASSWORD-ENCRYPTIONSyntaxno service password-encryptionParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration

Seite 416

Chapter 83: Local Manager Account Commands1372NO USERNAMESyntaxno username nameParametersnameSpecifies the name of the manager account you want to del

Seite 417 - ESTACK COMMAND-SWITCH

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1373SERVICE PASSWORD-ENCRYPTIONSyntaxservice password-encryptionParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeD

Seite 418 - ESTACK RUN

Chapter 83: Local Manager Account Commands1374USERNAMESyntaxusername name privilege level password [8] passwordParametersnameSpecifies the name of a n

Seite 419 - NO ESTACK COMMAND-SWITCH

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1375ExamplesThis example creates a manager account for the user, allen. The privilege level is 15 to give th

Seite 420 - NO ESTACK RUN

Chapter 83: Local Manager Account Commands1376

Seite 421 - RCOMMAND

1377Chapter 84Telnet ServerThis chapter provides the following topics: “Overview” on page 1378 “Enabling the Telnet Server” on page 1379 “Disabling

Seite 422 - REBOOT ESTACK MEMBER

Chapter 84: Telnet Server1378OverviewThe switch comes with a Telnet server so that you can remotely manage the device from Telnet clients on your netw

Seite 423

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1379Enabling the Telnet ServerTo enable the server, go to the Global Configuration mode and issue the SERVIC

Seite 424 - SHOW ESTACK

Chapter 7: Basic Switch Management138

Seite 425

Chapter 84: Telnet Server1380Disabling the Telnet ServerTo disable the Telnet server, use the NO SERVICE TELNET command in the Global Configuration mo

Seite 426 - SHOW ESTACK COMMAND-SWITCH

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1381Displaying the Telnet ServerTo display the status of the Telnet server, use the SHOW TELNET command in t

Seite 427 - SHOW ESTACK REMOTELIST

Chapter 84: Telnet Server1382

Seite 428

1383Chapter 85Telnet Server CommandsThe Telnet server commands are summarized in Table 147 and described in detail within the chapter.Table 147. Telne

Seite 429 - UPLOAD CONFIG REMOTELIST

Chapter 85: Telnet Server Commands1384NO SERVICE TELNETSyntaxno service telnetParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command t

Seite 430 - UPLOAD IMAGE REMOTELIST

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1385SERVICE TELNETSyntaxservice telnetParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command

Seite 431

Chapter 85: Telnet Server Commands1386SHOW TELNETSyntaxshow telnetParametersNoneModeUser Exec mode and Privileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command

Seite 432

1387Chapter 86Telnet ClientThis chapter provides the following topics: “Overview” on page 1388 “Starting a Remote Management Session with the Telnet

Seite 433 - Link-flap Protection

Chapter 86: Telnet Client1388OverviewThe switch has a Telnet client. You may use the client to remotely manage other network devices from the switch.

Seite 434

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1389Starting a Remote Management Session with the Telnet ClientHere are the steps to using the Telnet client

Seite 435

139Chapter 8Basic Switch Management CommandsThe basic switch management commands are summarized in Table 8.Table 8. Basic Switch Management CommandsCo

Seite 436 - Configuring the Feature

Chapter 86: Telnet Client1390

Seite 437 - Link-flap Protection Commands

1391Chapter 87Telnet Client CommandsThe Telnet client commands are summarized in Table 148 and described in detail within the chapter.Table 148. Telne

Seite 438 - LINK-FLAP DURATION

Chapter 87: Telnet Client Commands1392TELNETSyntaxtelnet ipv4_address [port]Parametersipv4_addressSpecifies the IPv4 address of a remote device you wa

Seite 439 - LINK-FLAP PROTECTION

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1393TELNET IPV6Syntaxtelnet ipv6 ipv6_address [port]Parametersipv6_addressSpecifies the IPv6 address of a re

Seite 440 - LINK-FLAP RATE

Chapter 87: Telnet Client Commands1394

Seite 441 - NO LINK-FLAP PROTECTION

1395Chapter 88Secure Shell (SSH) ServerThis chapter provides the following topics: “Overview” on page 1396 “Support for SSH” on page 1397 “SSH and

Seite 442 - SHOW LINK-FLAP

Chapter 88: Secure Shell (SSH) Server1396OverviewThe Secure Shell (SSH) protocol is an alternative to the Telnet protocol for remote management of the

Seite 443 - Port Mirror

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1397Support for SSHThe implementation of the SSH protocol on the switch is compliant with the SSH protocol v

Seite 444

Chapter 88: Secure Shell (SSH) Server1398 The SSH server uses protocol port 22. This parameter cannot be changed. If you are using the enhanced stac

Seite 445

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1399SSH and Enhanced StackingThe switch allows for encrypted SSH management sessions between a management st

Seite 446 - Chapter 25: Port Mirror

Contents14Chapter 42: DHCP Snooping Commands ...617ARP SE

Seite 447

Chapter 8: Basic Switch Management Commands140“REBOOT” on page 160 Privileged Exec Resets the switch.“RELOAD” on page 161 Privileged Exec Resets the s

Seite 448

Chapter 88: Secure Shell (SSH) Server1400Because enhanced stacking does not allow for SSH encrypted management sessions between a management station a

Seite 449 - Displaying the Port Mirror

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1401Creating the Encryption Key PairThe first step to using the SSH server on the switch for remote manageme

Seite 450

Chapter 88: Secure Shell (SSH) Server1402Enabling the SSH ServerThe switch does not allow you to enable the SSH server and begin remote management unt

Seite 451 - Port Mirror Commands

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1403Disabling the SSH ServerIf you decide that you want to disable the server because you do not want to rem

Seite 452

Chapter 88: Secure Shell (SSH) Server1404Deleting Encryption KeysTo delete encryption keys from the switch, use the CRYPTO KEY DESTROY HOSTKEY command

Seite 453 - MIRROR INTERFACE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1405Displaying the SSH ServerTo display the current settings of the server, enter this command in the Privil

Seite 454

Chapter 88: Secure Shell (SSH) Server1406

Seite 455 - NO MIRROR INTERFACE

1407Chapter 89SSH Server CommandsThe SSH server commands are summarized in Table 149 and described in detail within the chapter.Table 149. Secure Shel

Seite 456 - SHOW MIRROR

Chapter 89: SSH Server Commands1408CRYPTO KEY DESTROY HOSTKEYSyntaxcrypto key destroy hostkey dsa|rsa|rsa1ParametersdsaDeletes the DSA key.rsaDeletes

Seite 457

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1409This example deletes the RSA1 key:awplus> enableawplus# configure terminalawplus(config)# crypto key

Seite 458

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide141BANNER EXECSyntaxbanner execParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command to cre

Seite 459 - DHCP Relay Overview

Chapter 89: SSH Server Commands1410CRYPTO KEY GENERATE HOSTKEYSyntaxcrypto key generate hostkey dsa|rsa|rsa1 [value]ParametersdsaCreates a DSA key tha

Seite 460

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1411NoteCreating a key is a very CPU intensive process for the switch. The switch does not stop forwarding n

Seite 461 - Agent Option 82

Chapter 89: SSH Server Commands1412NO SERVICE SSHSyntaxno service sshParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command to disable

Seite 462 - Client Requests

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1413SERVICE SSHSyntaxservice sshParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command to en

Seite 463 - Message Length

Chapter 89: SSH Server Commands1414SHOW CRYPTO KEY HOSTKEYSyntaxshow crypto key hostkey [dsa|rsa|rsa1]ParametersdsaDisplays the DSA key.rsaDisplays th

Seite 464 - DHCP Servers

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1415SHOW SSH SERVERSyntaxshow ssh serverParametersNoneModesPrivileged Exec and Global Configuration modesDes

Seite 465 - Relay to the

Chapter 89: SSH Server Commands1416

Seite 466

1417Chapter 90Non-secure HTTP Web Browser ServerThis chapter describes the following topics: “Overview” on page 1418 “Enabling the Web Browser Serve

Seite 467 - Option 82

Chapter 90: Non-secure HTTP Web Browser Server1418OverviewThe switch has a web browser server. The server is used to remotely manage the unit over the

Seite 468

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1419Enabling the Web Browser ServerThe command to activate the web browser server for non-secure HTTP operat

Seite 469

Chapter 8: Basic Switch Management Commands142This example deletes the banner:awplus> enableawplus# configure terminalawplus(config)# no banner exe

Seite 470

Chapter 90: Non-secure HTTP Web Browser Server1420Setting the Protocol Port NumberThe default setting of port 80 for the protocol port of the HTTP web

Seite 471 - DHCP Relay Commands

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1421Disabling the Web Browser ServerThe command to disable the HTTP server is the NO SERVICE HTTP command in

Seite 472

Chapter 90: Non-secure HTTP Web Browser Server1422Displaying the Web Browser ServerTo display whether the HTTP web server is enabled or disabled on th

Seite 473 - IP DHCP-RELAY

1423Chapter 91Non-secure HTTP Web Browser Server CommandsThe non-secure HTTP web browser server commands are summarized in Table 150 and described in

Seite 474 - IP DHCP-RELAY AGENT-OPTION

Chapter 91: Non-secure HTTP Web Browser Server Commands1424SERVICE HTTPSyntaxservice httpParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse thi

Seite 475

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1425IP HTTP PORTSyntaxip http port portParametersportSpecifies the TCP port number the HTTP web server liste

Seite 476

Chapter 91: Non-secure HTTP Web Browser Server Commands1426NO SERVICE HTTPSyntaxno http serverParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUs

Seite 477

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1427SHOW IP HTTPSyntaxshow ip httpParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to displ

Seite 478

Chapter 91: Non-secure HTTP Web Browser Server Commands1428

Seite 479 - IP DHCP-RELAY MAXHOPS

1429Chapter 92Secure HTTPS Web Browser ServerThis chapter describes the following topics: “Overview” on page 1430 “Creating a Self-signed Certificat

Seite 480 - IP DHCP-RELAY SERVER-ADDRESS

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide143BANNER LOGINSyntaxbanner loginParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command to c

Seite 481 - NO IP DHCP-RELAY

Chapter 92: Secure HTTPS Web Browser Server1430OverviewThe switch has a web browser server for remote management of the unit with a web browser applic

Seite 482 - NO IP DHCP-RELAY AGENT-OPTION

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1431Private CAs allow companies to keep track of the certificates and control access to various network devi

Seite 483

Chapter 92: Secure HTTPS Web Browser Server1432NoteIf the certificate will be issued by a private or public CA, you should check with the CA to see if

Seite 484 - 214.154.35.78

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1433Creating a Self-signed CertificateHere are the main steps to configuring the switch for a self-signed ce

Seite 485 - NO SERVICE DHCP-RELAY

Chapter 92: Secure HTTPS Web Browser Server1434At this point, the switch, if it has a management IP address, is ready for remote management with a web

Seite 486 - SERVICE DHCP-RELAY

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1435The switch is now ready for remote web browser management with HTTPS, provided that it has a management

Seite 487 - SHOW IP DHCP-RELAY

Chapter 92: Secure HTTPS Web Browser Server1436Configuring the HTTPS Web Server for a Certificate Issued by a CAHere are the main steps to configuring

Seite 488

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide14377. Designate the new certificate from the CA as the active certificate on the switch with “IP HTTPS CERT

Seite 489 - Group Link Control

Chapter 92: Secure HTTPS Web Browser Server1438awplus(config)# crypto certificate 1 request 124.201.76.54 Production ABC_Industries San_Jose Californi

Seite 490

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1439The switch, if it has a management IP address, is now ready for remote HTTPS web browser management. To

Seite 491

Chapter 8: Basic Switch Management Commands144This example removes the login banner:awplus> enableawplus# configure terminalawplus(config)# no bann

Seite 492

Chapter 92: Secure HTTPS Web Browser Server1440Enabling the Web Browser ServerThe command to activate the web browser server for secure HTTPS operatio

Seite 493

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1441Disabling the Web Browser ServerThe command to disable the HTTPS mode is the NO SERVICE HTTPS command in

Seite 494

Chapter 92: Secure HTTPS Web Browser Server1442Displaying the Web Browser ServerTo display whether the HTTPS web server is enabled or disabled on the

Seite 495

1443Chapter 93Secure HTTPS Web Browser Server CommandsThe secure HTTPS web browser server commands are summarized in Table 151 and described in detail

Seite 496

Chapter 93: Secure HTTPS Web Browser Server Commands1444CRYPTO CERTIFICATE DESTROYSyntaxcrypto certificate id_number destroyParametersid_numberSpecifi

Seite 497

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1445CRYPTO CERTIFICATE GENERATESyntaxcrypto certificate id_number generate length passphrase common_name org

Seite 498

Chapter 93: Secure HTTPS Web Browser Server Commands1446countrySpecifies the ISO 3166-1 initials of a country. This parameter must be two uppercase ch

Seite 499 - Configuration Examples

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1447 Organizational unit: Sales Organization: Jones_Industries Location: San_Jose State: California Cou

Seite 500

Chapter 93: Secure HTTPS Web Browser Server Commands1448CRYPTO CERTIFICATE IMPORTSyntaxcrypto certificate id_number importParametersid_numberSpecifies

Seite 501

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1449CRYPTO CERTIFICATE REQUESTSyntaxcrypto certificate id_number request common_name organizational_unit org

Seite 502

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide145BANNER MOTDSyntaxbanner motdParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command to cre

Seite 503 - Group Link Control Commands

Chapter 93: Secure HTTPS Web Browser Server Commands1450DescriptionUse this command to create certificate enrollment requests for submittal to public

Seite 504 - GROUP-LINK-CONTROL

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1451SERVICE HTTPSSyntaxservice httpsParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command t

Seite 505 - GROUP-LINK-CONTROL DOWNSTREAM

Chapter 93: Secure HTTPS Web Browser Server Commands1452IP HTTPS CERTIFICATESyntaxip https certificate id_numberParametersid_numberSpecifies a certifi

Seite 506

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1453NO SERVICE HTTPSSyntaxno service httpsParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this com

Seite 507 - GROUP-LINK-CONTROL UPSTREAM

Chapter 93: Secure HTTPS Web Browser Server Commands1454SHOW CRYPTO CERTIFICATESyntaxshow crypto certificate id_numberParametersid_numberSpecifies a c

Seite 508 - NO GROUP-LINK-CONTROL

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1455SHOW IP HTTPSSyntaxshow ip httpParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to disp

Seite 509

Chapter 93: Secure HTTPS Web Browser Server Commands1456ExampleThis example displays the status of the HTTPS server and basic information about the ce

Seite 510

1457Chapter 94RADIUS and TACACS+ ClientsThis chapter describes the following topics: “Overview” on page 1458 “Remote Manager Accounts” on page 1459

Seite 511 - SHOW GROUP-LINK-CONTROL

Chapter 94: RADIUS and TACACS+ Clients1458OverviewThe switch has RADIUS and TACACS+ clients for remote authentication. Here are the two features that

Seite 512

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1459Remote Manager AccountsThe switch has one local manager account. The account is referred to as a local a

Seite 513 - Multicast Commands

Chapter 8: Basic Switch Management Commands146This example removes the message-of-the-day banner:awplus> enableawplus# configure terminalawplus(con

Seite 514

Chapter 94: RADIUS and TACACS+ Clients1460the switch, the privilege level of an account is ignored and all accounts have access to the entire command

Seite 515

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide14614. Configure the RADIUS or TACACS+ client on the switch by entering the IP addresses of up to three auth

Seite 516

Chapter 94: RADIUS and TACACS+ Clients1462Managing the RADIUS ClientThe following subsections describe how to manage the RADIUS client: “Adding IP Ad

Seite 517

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1463The AUTH-PORT parameter specifies the UDP destination port for RADIUS authentication requests. If 0 is s

Seite 518

Chapter 94: RADIUS and TACACS+ Clients1464This example sets the RADIUS timeout to 15 seconds:awplus> enableawplus# configure terminalawplus(config)

Seite 519 - File System

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1465Deleting ServerIP AddressesTo delete the IP address of a RADIUS server from the list of servers on the s

Seite 520

Chapter 94: RADIUS and TACACS+ Clients1466Managing the TACACS+ ClientThe following subsections describe how to manage the TACACS+ client: “Adding IP

Seite 521

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1467This example adds the IP address 115.16.172.54 as a TACACS+ authentication server at the bottom of the l

Seite 522

Chapter 94: RADIUS and TACACS+ Clients1468Deleting IPAddresses ofTACACS+ServersTo delete the IP address of a TACACS+ server from the client on the swi

Seite 523 - destinationfile

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1469Configuring Remote Authentication of Manager AccountsCheck that you performed the following steps before

Seite 524

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide147BAUD-RATE SETSyntaxbaud-rate set 1200|2400|4800|9600|19200|38400|57600|115200ParametersNoneModeGlobal Con

Seite 525

Chapter 94: RADIUS and TACACS+ Clients1470uses for remote Telnet and SSH sessions. (For background information, refer to “VTY Lines” on page 77.)Toggl

Seite 526 - Chapter 32: File System

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1471The LINE_ID parameter has a range of 0 to 9. The following example of the command toggles off remote aut

Seite 527

Chapter 94: RADIUS and TACACS+ Clients1472

Seite 528

1473Chapter 95RADIUS and TACACS+ Client CommandsThe commands for the RADIUS and TACACS+ clients are summarized in Table 153 and described in detail wi

Seite 529 - File System Commands

Chapter 95: RADIUS and TACACS+ Client Commands1474“RADIUS-SERVER TIMEOUT” on page 1491Global ConfigurationSpecifies the maximum amount of time the RAD

Seite 530

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1475AAA ACCOUNTING LOGINSyntaxaaa accounting login default start-stop|stop-only|none group radius|tacacs Par

Seite 531

Chapter 95: RADIUS and TACACS+ Client Commands1476Confirmation Commands“SHOW RADIUS” on page 1492“SHOW TACACS” on page 1494ExamplesTo configure RADIUS

Seite 532 - DELETE FORCE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1477AAA AUTHENTICATION ENABLE (TACACS+)Syntaxaaa authentication enable default group tacacs [local]Parameter

Seite 533

Chapter 95: RADIUS and TACACS+ Client Commands1478command is attempted if a TACACS+ server is not available, use the following commands:awplus> ena

Seite 534

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1479AAA AUTHENTICATION LOGINSyntaxaaa authentication login default [group radius|tacacs] [local]Parametersde

Seite 535 - SHOW FILE SYSTEMS

Chapter 8: Basic Switch Management Commands148CLOCK SETSyntaxclock set hh:mm:ss dd mmm yyyyParametershh:mm:ssSpecifies the hour, minute, and second fo

Seite 536

Chapter 95: RADIUS and TACACS+ Client Commands1480Confirmation Commands“SHOW RADIUS” on page 1492“SHOW TACACS” on page 1494ExamplesTo enable RADIUS se

Seite 537 - Boot Configuration Files

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1481IP RADIUS SOURCE-INTERFACESyntaxip radius source-interface Ipv4 Address | VIDParametersIpv4 AddressIndic

Seite 538

Chapter 95: RADIUS and TACACS+ Client Commands1482This example removes the RADIUS source IP address from the RADIUS client:awplus> enableawplus# co

Seite 539

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1483LOGIN AUTHENTICATIONSyntaxlogin authenticationParametersNoneModesConsole Line and Virtual Terminal Line

Seite 540

Chapter 95: RADIUS and TACACS+ Client Commands1484This example activates remote authentication for remote Telnet and SSH management sessions that use

Seite 541

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1485NO LOGIN AUTHENTICATIONSyntaxno login authenticationParametersNoneModesConsole Line and Virtual Terminal

Seite 542

Chapter 95: RADIUS and TACACS+ Client Commands1486NO RADIUS-SERVER HOSTSyntaxno radius-server host ipaddressParameteripaddressSpecifies an IP address

Seite 543 - Chapter 35

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1487NO TACACS-SERVER HOSTSyntaxno tacacs-server host ipaddressParameteripaddressSpecifies an IP address of a

Seite 544 - BOOT CONFIG-FILE

Chapter 95: RADIUS and TACACS+ Client Commands1488RADIUS-SERVER HOSTSyntaxradius-server host ipaddress [acct-port value] [auth-port value] [key value]

Seite 545

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1489ExamplesThis example adds a RADIUS server with the IP address 176.225.15.23. The UDP port is 1811, and t

Seite 546 - COPY RUNNING-CONFIG

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide149ERASE STARTUP-CONFIGSyntaxerase startup-configParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this c

Seite 547

Chapter 95: RADIUS and TACACS+ Client Commands1490RADIUS-SERVER KEYSyntaxradius-server key valueParameterskeySpecifies the global encryption key of th

Seite 548

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1491RADIUS-SERVER TIMEOUTSyntaxradius-server timeout valueParameterstimeoutSpecifies the maximum amount of t

Seite 549 - NO BOOT CONFIG-FILE

Chapter 95: RADIUS and TACACS+ Client Commands1492SHOW RADIUSSyntaxshow radiusParametersNoneModesPrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to di

Seite 550 - SHOW BOOT

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1493ExampleThis example displays the configuration of the RADIUS client:awplus# show radiusAccounting Port T

Seite 551

Chapter 95: RADIUS and TACACS+ Client Commands1494SHOW TACACSSyntaxshow tacacsParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to dis

Seite 552 - SHOW STARTUP-CONFIG

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1495ExampleThis example displays the configuration of the TACACS+ client on the switch:awplus# show tacacsSe

Seite 553

Chapter 95: RADIUS and TACACS+ Client Commands1496TACACS-SERVER HOSTSyntaxtacacs-server host ipaddress [key value]ParametershostSpecifies an IP addres

Seite 554

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1497TACACS-SERVER KEYSyntaxtacacs-server key valueParametersvalueSpecifies the global encryption key of the

Seite 555 - File Transfer

Chapter 95: RADIUS and TACACS+ Client Commands1498TACACS-SERVER TIMEOUTSyntaxtacacs-server timeout valueParameterstimeoutSpecifies the maximum amount

Seite 556

1499Section XIIIQuality of ServiceThis section contains the following chapters: Chapter 96, “Advanced Access Control Lists (ACLs)” on page 1501 Chap

Seite 557 - Software with

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide15Displaying the Syslog Server Definitions ...

Seite 558 - Switch with

Chapter 8: Basic Switch Management Commands150EXEC-TIMEOUTSyntaxexec-timeout valueParametersexec-timeoutSpecifies the session timer in minutes. The ra

Seite 560 - 20100601091645.txt

1501Chapter 96Advanced Access Control Lists (ACLs)This chapter describes the following topics: “Overview” on page 1502 “Creating ACLs” on page 1505

Seite 561

Chapter 96: Advanced Access Control Lists (ACLs)1502OverviewAccess Control Lists (ACLs) act as filters to control the ingress packets on ports. They a

Seite 562

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1503Actions The action defines the response to packets that match the filtering criterion of the ACL. There

Seite 563 - Waiting to send

Chapter 96: Advanced Access Control Lists (ACLs)1504Guidelines Here are the ACL guidelines: An ACL can have a permit, deny, or copy-to-mirror action.

Seite 564 - Chapter 36: File Transfer

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1505Creating ACLsThis section provides examples of how to create all of the ACL types. See the following: “

Seite 565

Chapter 96: Advanced Access Control Lists (ACLs)1506Numbered IPv4 ACL with IP Packets ExamplesThis is the command format for creating ACLs that filter

Seite 566

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1507 host ipaddress— Matches packets with a specified IPv4 address and is an alternative to the IPADRESS/MA

Seite 567 - File Transfer Commands

Chapter 96: Advanced Access Control Lists (ACLs)1508deny ACL for the denied traffic flow. This is illustrated in the example in Table 160 in which por

Seite 568 - COPY FILENAME ZMODEM

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1509NoteThe permit ACLS are added to the ports before the deny ACL to ensure that packets are compared again

Seite 569 - COPY FLASH TFTP

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide151This example sets the session timer for the first (vty 0) Telnet or SSH session to 5 minutes:awplus> e

Seite 570 - COPY TFTP FLASH

Chapter 96: Advanced Access Control Lists (ACLs)1510Here is an example of an ACL that filters tagged packets. See Table 162. It blocks all tagged pack

Seite 571

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1511is only necessary when you want a port to forward a subset of packets that are otherwise discarded. den

Seite 572 - COPY ZMODEM

Chapter 96: Advanced Access Control Lists (ACLs)1512Numbered IPv4 ACL with Protocol Packets ExampleThis is the command format for creating Numbered IP

Seite 573

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1513The VLAN parameter determines if an ACL filters VLANs. You use the parameter to specify the VID. You can

Seite 574

Chapter 96: Advanced Access Control Lists (ACLs)1514The SRC_IPADDRESS and DST_IPADDRESS parameters specify the source and destination IPv4 addresses.

Seite 575 - Snooping

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1515The following example configures two Numbered IPv4 ACLs. ACL 3017 permits packets from TCP port 67 to 87

Seite 576

Chapter 96: Advanced Access Control Lists (ACLs)1516together with the port mirror feature, explained in Chapter 25, “Port Mirror” on page 443.The SRC_

Seite 577 - (IGMP) Snooping

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1517The VLAN parameter determines if an ACL filters VLANs. You use the parameter to specify the VID. You can

Seite 578

Chapter 96: Advanced Access Control Lists (ACLs)1518 copy-to-mirror— Copies all ingress packets that match the ACL to the destination port of the mir

Seite 579

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1519The example in Table 167 configures port 19 to reject packets containing destination MAC addresses start

Seite 580 - Host Node Topology

Chapter 8: Basic Switch Management Commands152HELPSyntaxhelpParametersNoneModeAll modesDescriptionUse this command to learn how to use on-line help. E

Seite 581 - Enabling IGMP Snooping

Chapter 96: Advanced Access Control Lists (ACLs)1520This example creates a Named IPv4 ICMP ACL, called “icmppermit,” that permits ICMP packets from an

Seite 582

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1521Creating NamedIPv6 AddressACLsThe Named IPv6 address ACLs are created with the IPv6 ACCESS-LIST commands

Seite 583

Chapter 96: Advanced Access Control Lists (ACLs)1522This example creates a protocol ACL, called “protocopytomirror,” that copies RDP packets (protocol

Seite 584 - Disabling IGMP Snooping

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1523Assigning ACLs to PortsBefore you can assign an ACL to a port, you must first create an ACL. The command

Seite 585 - Displaying IGMP Snooping

Chapter 96: Advanced Access Control Lists (ACLs)1524In this example, ports 12 and 13 are assigned an ACL, ID number 3075, that blocks all untagged ing

Seite 586

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1525Assigning NamedIPv4 ACLsTo assign a Named IPv4 ACL to a port on the switch, use the ACCESS-GROUP command

Seite 587 - IGMP Snooping Commands

Chapter 96: Advanced Access Control Lists (ACLs)1526Assigning NamedIPv6 ACLsTo assign a Named IPv6 ACL to a port on the switch, use the IPV6 TRAFFIC-F

Seite 588 - CLEAR IP IGMP

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1527Removing ACLs from PortsThe command that you use to remove an ACL from a port depends on which type of A

Seite 589 - IP IGMP LIMIT

Chapter 96: Advanced Access Control Lists (ACLs)1528This example removes a MAC ACL with an ID number of 4037 from port 5:Removing NamedIPv4 ACLsTo rem

Seite 590 - IP IGMP QUERIER-TIMEOUT

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1529The following example removes a Named IPv6 ACL called “icmpdeny” from port 17:Table 180. Removing Named

Seite 591 - IP IGMP SNOOPING

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide153HOSTNAMESyntaxhostname nameParametersnameSpecifies a name of up to 39 alphanumeric characters for the swi

Seite 592

Chapter 96: Advanced Access Control Lists (ACLs)1530Deleting ACLs from the SwitchThe command that you use to delete an ACL from the switch depends on

Seite 593

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1531The following example deletes a MAC ACL with ID number 4415 from the switch:Deleting NamedIPv4 AddressAC

Seite 594 - IP IGMP SNOOPING MROUTER

Chapter 96: Advanced Access Control Lists (ACLs)1532This example deletes a Named IPv6 address ACL with the list name “denytcp” from the switch:Table 1

Seite 595 - IP IGMP STATUS

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1533Setting ACL Time RangesBy default, an ACL filter is effective immediately. However, if you want to set a

Seite 596 - NO IP IGMP SNOOPING

Chapter 96: Advanced Access Control Lists (ACLs)1534The following example creates a time range setting that starts on Mondays through Fridays from 7 a

Seite 597 - NO IP IGMP SNOOPING MROUTER

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1535Displaying the ACLsThere are several ways of displaying information about ACLs on the switch. For exampl

Seite 598 - SHOW IP IGMP SNOOPING

Chapter 96: Advanced Access Control Lists (ACLs)1536The following example displays the ACLs assigned to ports 1 to 5:awplus# show interface port1.0.1-

Seite 599

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1537.Figure 248. SHOW TIME-RANGE Commandawplus# show time-rangeTime-Range t1absolute start 09:00:00 2 Januar

Seite 600

Chapter 96: Advanced Access Control Lists (ACLs)1538

Seite 601

1539Chapter 97ACL CommandsThe Access Control List (ACL) commands are summarized in Table 188 and described in detail within the chapter.Table 188. Acc

Seite 602

Chapter 8: Basic Switch Management Commands154LINE CONSOLESyntaxline console 0ParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command t

Seite 603 - Multiple Queriers

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1540“IP ACCESS-LIST (IP)” on page 1575 IP ACL Defines an ACL that filters IP packets based on source and destination IP addres

Seite 604 - .2 Enabled Enabled Active

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1541“NO ACCESS-LIST” on page 1612 Global ConfigurationDeletes ACLs from the switch.“NO ACCESS-GROUP” on page

Seite 605 - .4 Enabled Enabled Standby

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1542ABSOLUTE STARTSyntaxabsolute start <hours:minutes:seconds DD MM YYYY> end <hours:minutes:seconds DD MM YYYY>Pa

Seite 606

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1543ExamplesThis example uses a time range called “February2012” that enables the permit or deny statement t

Seite 607

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1544ACCESS-CLASSSyntaxaccess-class <3000 - 3699>|<4000 - 4699>access-class <3000 - 3699>|<4000 - 4699>

Seite 608 - Configuring

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1545ExampleThis example assigns the switch an IP address of 10.0.0.20/24. It creates a Numbered ACL with an

Seite 609

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1546ACCESS-GROUPSyntaxaccess-group id_numberaccess-group id_number|list_nameParametersid_numberSpecifies the ID number of an a

Seite 610

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1547ExamplesThis example adds an IP ACL with an ID of 3022 to port 15:awplus> enableawplus# configure ter

Seite 611 - Chapter 41

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1548ACCESS-LIST (MAC Address)Syntaxaccess-list id_number action src_mac_address|any src_mac_mask dst_mac_address|any dst_mac_m

Seite 612 - IP IGMP QUERY-INTERVAL

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1549dst_mac_addressSpecifies the destination MAC address of the ingress packets. Choose from the following o

Seite 613 - IP IGMP SNOOPING QUERIER

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide155LINE VTYSyntaxline vty first_line_id [last_line_id]Parametersfirst_line_idSpecifies the number of a VTY l

Seite 614 - NO IP IGMP SNOOPING QUERIER

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1550awplus(config_if)# mac access-group 4002awplus(config_if)# mac access-group 4003awplus(config_if)# mac access-group 4011aw

Seite 615 - SHOW IP IGMP INTERFACE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1551ACCESS-LIST ICMPSyntaxaccess-list id_number action icmp src_ipaddress dst_ipaddress [vlan vid]Parameters

Seite 616

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1552ipaddress/mask: Matches packets that have a destination IP address of a specific subnet or end node. host ipaddress: Match

Seite 617 - DHCP Snooping Commands

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1553This example adds a deny access list to ports 4 and 5 to discard all untagged ingress packets that are I

Seite 618

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1554ACCESS-LIST IPSyntaxaccess-list id_number action ip src_ipaddress dst_ipaddress [vlan vid]Parametersid_numberSpecifies the

Seite 619 - ARP SECURITY

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1555dst_ipaddress: Specifies the destination IP address of the ingress packets the access list should filter

Seite 620 - ARP SECURITY VIOLATION

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1556This example creates a deny access list, ID number 3095, that discards all untagged ingress packets that have destination

Seite 621

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1557This example configures ports 22 and 23 to accept only untagged ingress packets containing destination a

Seite 622 - CLEAR ARP SECURITY STATISTICS

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1558ACCESS-LIST PROTOSyntaxaccess-list id_number action proto protocol_number src_ipaddress dst_ipaddress [vlan vid]Parameters

Seite 623

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1559dst_ipaddressSpecifies the destination IP address of the ingress packets the access list should filter.

Seite 624

Chapter 8: Basic Switch Management Commands156NO HOSTNAMESyntaxno hostnameParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command to de

Seite 625

Chapter 97: ACL Commands15609 IGP (Interior Gateway Protocol) (IANA)11 Network Voice Protocol (RFC741)17 UDP (User Datagram Protocol) (RFC768)20 Host

Seite 626 - IP DHCP SNOOPING

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1561Confirmation Commands“SHOW ACCESS-LIST” on page 1619 and “SHOW INTERFACE ACCESS-GROUP” on page 1621Examp

Seite 627 - IP DHCP SNOOPING AGENT-OPTION

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1562awplus(config_if)# access-group 3011awplus(config_if)# endawplus# show access-listawplus# show interface port1.0.5,port1.0

Seite 628

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1563ACCESS-LIST TCPSyntaxaccess-list id_number action tcp src_ipaddress eq|lt|gt|ne|range src_tcp_port dst_i

Seite 629 - IP DHCP SNOOPING BINDING

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1564ltMatches packets that are less than the TCP port number specified by the SRC_TCP_PORT or DST_TCP_PORT parameter.gtMatches

Seite 630

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1565ModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command to create access control lists that filter ingr

Seite 631

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1566This example creates an ACL that causes port 14 to discard all tagged ingress TCP packets with the VID 27, regardless of t

Seite 632

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1567ACCESS-LIST UDPSyntaxaccess-list id_number action udp src_ipaddress eq|lt|gt|ne|range src_udp_port dst_i

Seite 633 - IP DHCP SNOOPING MAX-BINDINGS

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1568ltMatches packets that are less than the UDP port number specified by the SRC_UDP_PORT or DST_UDP_PORT parameter.gtMatches

Seite 634

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1569ModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command to create access control lists that filter ingr

Seite 635

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide157PINGSyntaxping ipaddress|hostnameParametersipaddressSpecifies the IP address of the network device to rec

Seite 636

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1570This example defines an ACL that causes port 18 to discard all untagged ingress packets that have source and destination U

Seite 637 - IP DHCP SNOOPING TRUST

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1571IP ACCESS-LIST Syntaxip access-list nameParametersnameSpecifies the name of the IP ACL.ModeGlobal Config

Seite 638 - IP DHCP VERIFY MAC-ADDRESS

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1572IP ACCESS-LIST (ICMP)Syntaxaction deny|permit|copy-to-mirror icmp scr_ipaddress any|host dest_ipaddress any|host time-rang

Seite 639

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1573For example, the subnet address 149.11.11.0 would have a mask of “24” for the twenty-four bits of the ne

Seite 640 - IP DHCP SNOOPING VIOLATION

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1574This example creates a Named ICMP ACL, called “icmpdeny,” that denies ICMP packets from source IP source address 190.155.2

Seite 641

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1575IP ACCESS-LIST (IP)Syntaxaction deny|permit|copy-to-mirror ip scr_ipaddress any|host dest_ipaddress any|

Seite 642 - IP SOURCE BINDING

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1576For example, the subnet address 149.11.11.0 would have a mask of “24” for the twenty-four bits of the network section of t

Seite 643

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1577This example creates a Named IP ACL, called “ipdeny,” that denies ICMP packets from source IP address 19

Seite 644 - SERVICE DHCP SNOOPING

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1578IP ACCESS-LIST (MAC)Syntaxaction deny|permit|copy-to-mirror mac scr_mac_address any|host dest_mac_address any|host [vlan v

Seite 645

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1579dst_mac_addressSpecifies the destination MAC address of the ingress packets. Choose from the following o

Seite 646 - SHOW ARP SECURITY

Chapter 8: Basic Switch Management Commands158NoteThe switch sends the ICMP Echo Requests from the ports of the VLAN assigned the management IP addres

Seite 647

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1580ExamplesThis example creates a Named IP ACL, called “permitmac,” that permits packets from source MAC address 12:a3:4b:89:

Seite 648 - SHOW ARP SECURITY INTERFACE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1581IP ACCESS-LIST (PROTO)Syntaxaction deny|permit|copy-to-mirror proto protocol_number scr_ip_address any|h

Seite 649

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1582dest_ipaddressMaskSpecifies the destination IP address of the ingress packets the access list should filter. Choose from t

Seite 650 - SHOW ARP SECURITY STATISTICS

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1583ExamplesThis example creates a Named IP ACL, called “permitproto8,” that permits all EGP packets (protoc

Seite 651

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1584IP ACCESS-LIST (TCP)Syntaxaction deny|permit|copy-to-mirror tcp scr_ipaddress any|host gt|lt|ne|range|eq src_tcp_port dest

Seite 652 - SHOW IP DHCP SNOOPING

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1585gtMatches packets that are greater than the TCP port number specified by the src_ipaddress parameter.neM

Seite 653

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1586eqMatches packets that are equal to the TCP port number specified by the dest_ipaddress parameter.dst_tcp_portSpecifies th

Seite 654 - SHOW IP DHCP SNOOPING BINDING

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1587This example creates a deny access list called “denytcp” that discards all tagged ingress TCP packets fr

Seite 655

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1588IP ACCESS-LIST (UDP)Syntaxaction deny|permit|copy-to-mirror udp scr_ipaddress any|host gt|lt|ne|range|eq src_upd_port dest

Seite 656

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1589gtMatches packets that are greater than the TCP port number specified by the src_ipaddress parameter.neM

Seite 657

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide159PING IPv6Syntaxping ipv6 <ipv6-address> repeat <1-99> size <36-18024> Parametersipv6-ad

Seite 658 - SHOW IP SOURCE BINDING

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1590eqMatches packets that are equal to the TCP port number specified by the dest_ipaddress parameter.dst_udp_portSpecifies th

Seite 659

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1591This example discards tagged packets from UDP ports 67 to 87 if they are from the 154.11.234.0 network a

Seite 660

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1592IPV6 ACCESS-LISTSyntaxipv6 access-list <ipv6 access-list>Parametersipv6 access-listSpecifies the name of an IPv6 ACL

Seite 661 - Event Messages

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1593IPV6 ACCESS-LIST (ICMP)Syntaxaction deny|permit|copy-to-mirror icmp scr_ip_address any|host dest_ipaddre

Seite 662

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1594ipaddress/mask: Matches packets that have a destination IPv6 address of a subnet or an end node in the X:X::X:X/mask forma

Seite 663 - Event Log

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1595ExamplesThis example creates an ICMP ACL called “icmpdeny1” that denies ICMP packets from any IPv6 sourc

Seite 664

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1596IPV6 ACCESS-LIST (IP)Syntaxaction deny|permit|copy-to-mirror ip scr_ip_address any|ipaddress|host dest_ipaddress any|ipadd

Seite 665 - Displaying the Event Log

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1597number of bits in the address, from left to right, that constitute the network portion of the address. T

Seite 666 - Clearing the Event Log

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1598This example creates an IP ACL, called “ipdeny2,” that denies IP packets from IPv6 source address fe80::202:b3ff:fele:8329

Seite 667 - Event Log Commands

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1599IPV6 ACCESS-LIST (PROTO)Syntaxaction deny|permit|copy-to-mirror proto proto_type scr_ip_address any|ipad

Seite 668

Contents16Forwarding Delay and Topology Changes ...758Hell

Seite 669 - CLEAR LOG

Chapter 8: Basic Switch Management Commands160REBOOTSyntaxrebootParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to reset the switch.

Seite 670 - CLEAR LOG BUFFERED

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1600ipaddress/mask: Matches packets that have a destination IPv6 address of a subnet or an end node in the X:X::X:X/mask forma

Seite 671 - CLEAR LOG PERMANENT

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide16012001:0db8::a2:1c50/64 any awplus(config-ipv6-acl)# exitawplus(config)# interface port1.0.9awplus(config_

Seite 672 - LOG BUFFERED

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1602IPV6 ACCESS-LIST (TCP)Syntaxaction deny|permit|copy-to-mirror tcp scr_ip_address any|host eq|lt|gt|ne src_tcp_port dest_ip

Seite 673

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1603gtMatches packets that are greater than the TCP port number specified by the src_ipaddress parameter.neM

Seite 674 - LOG CONSOLE

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1604eqMatches packets that are equal to the TCP port number specified by the dest_ipaddress parameter.dst_tcp_portSpecifies th

Seite 675

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1605This example creates an ACL that discards all untagged ingress packets that have the source and destinat

Seite 676 - LOG PERMANENT

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1606IPV6 ACCESS-LIST (UDP)Syntaxaction deny|permit|copy-to-mirror udp scr_ip_address any|host eq|lt|gt|ne|range dest_ipaddress

Seite 677 - NO LOG BUFFERED

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1607gtMatches packets that are greater than the UDP port number specified by the src_ipaddress parameter.neM

Seite 678 - OUtputID Type Status Details

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1608time-rangeSpecifies the name of a time range that is created with the TIME-RANGE command. You must create a time range bef

Seite 679 - NO LOG CONSOLE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1609This example discards tagged packets from UDP ports 67 to 87 if they are from the 154.11.234.0/64 networ

Seite 680 - NO LOG PERMANENT

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide161RELOADSyntaxreloadParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to reset the switch.

Seite 681

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1610IPV6 TRAFFIC-FILTERSyntaxipv6 traffic-filter <ipv6_access_list>Parameters<ipv6_access_list>Specifies the name

Seite 682 - SHOW LOG

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1611MAC ACCESS-GROUPSyntaxmac access-group id_numberParametersid_numberSpecifies the ID number of a MAC addr

Seite 683

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1612NO ACCESS-LISTSyntaxno access-list id_numberParametersid_numberSpecifies the ID number of an access list you want to delet

Seite 684

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1613NO ACCESS-GROUPSyntaxno access-group id_numberParametersid_numberSpecifies the ID number of an access li

Seite 685 - SHOW LOG CONFIG

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1614NO MAC ACCESS-GROUPSyntaxno mac access-group id_numberParametersid_numberSpecifies the ID number of a MAC address access l

Seite 686

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1615PERIODICSyntaxperiodic day days-of-the-week time (hh:mm:ss) to day days-of-the-week time (hh:mm:ss) Para

Seite 687 - SHOW LOG PERMANENT

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1616ExamplesThis example sets the date and time range from Monday at 12:01 am to Thursday at 4:00 pm:awplus> enableawplus#

Seite 688 - SHOW LOG PERMANENT TAIL

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1617PERIODIC (DAILY)Syntaxperiodic day (daily|weekdays|weekend) time (hh:mm:ss) to time (hh:mm:ss) Parameter

Seite 689 - SHOW LOG REVERSE

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1618This example sets the date and time range from 9 am Monday morning to 5 pm Friday evening:awplus> enableawplus# configu

Seite 690 - SHOW LOG TAIL

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1619SHOW ACCESS-LISTSyntaxshow access-list [<3000-3699>|<4000-4699>|<list-name>]Parameters

Seite 691 - Syslog Client

Chapter 8: Basic Switch Management Commands162SERVICE MAXMANAGERSyntaxservice maxmanager valueParametersvalueSpecifies the maximum number of manager s

Seite 692

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1620ExampleThis example displays Numbered IP, MAC, and Named IP ACLs:awplus# show access-listFigure 249. SHOW ACCESS-LIST Comm

Seite 693 - program

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1621SHOW INTERFACE ACCESS-GROUPSyntaxshow interface port access-groupParametersportSpecifies a port number.

Seite 694 - Chapter 45: Syslog Client

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1622SHOW IPV6 ACCESS-LISTSyntaxshow ipv6 access-list <list-name>Parameters<list-name>Specifies the name of an IPv6

Seite 695

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1623SHOW TIME-RANGESyntaxshow time-range ParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command t

Seite 696

Chapter 97: ACL Commands1624TIME-RANGE Syntaxtime-range <time-range-name>Parameterstime-range-nameSpecifies a name of a time range.ModeGlobal Co

Seite 697

1625Chapter 98Quality of Service (QoS)This chapter describes the following topics: “Overview” on page 1626 “Enabling QoS on the Switch” on page 1628

Seite 698

Chapter 98: Quality of Service (QoS)1626OverviewQuality of Service (QoS) refers to the latency, bandwidth, jitter, and loss settings that high-bandwid

Seite 699 - Syslog Client Commands

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1627A twin-rate policer allows you to determine the CIR and CBS as well as two additional values: Peak Info

Seite 700 - LOG HOST

Chapter 98: Quality of Service (QoS)1628Enabling QoS on the SwitchBy default, the QoS feature is disabled on the switch. You must enable the QoS featu

Seite 701

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1629Creating a Class MapTo define filtering criteria, you need to create a class map. You create a class map

Seite 702 - NO LOG HOST

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide163SHOW BANNER LOGINSyntaxshow banner login ParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this comman

Seite 703

Chapter 98: Quality of Service (QoS)1630NoteIf a conflict occurs between the settings in two class maps assigned to the same policy map, priority is g

Seite 704

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1631number parameter allows you to add an access group to a class map by specifying an ACL number. For more

Seite 705 - Port Trunks

Chapter 98: Quality of Service (QoS)1632Adding a CoS Value to a Class MapChoosing the CoS value allows you to add the user priority level to a class m

Seite 706

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1633Adding a DSCP Value to a Class MapYou can specify a DSCP value level of 0, which is the lowest priority,

Seite 707 - Static Port Trunks

Chapter 98: Quality of Service (QoS)1634Adding MAC-Type to a Class MapTo add the destination MAC address type, or MAC-type, to a class map, use the MA

Seite 708

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1635Adding a TCP Flag to a Class MapTo set TCP flags for a class map which are used as matching criteria, us

Seite 709 -  Source IP Address (Layer 3)

Chapter 98: Quality of Service (QoS)1636Creating a Policy MapAfter you have created one or more class maps, you need to create a policy map which allo

Seite 710

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1637Associating aClass Map With aPolicy MapTo associate a class map to a policy map, use the CLASS command.

Seite 711

Chapter 98: Quality of Service (QoS)1638Configuring Default Class MapsEach time you create a new policy map, a new class map called default is created

Seite 712

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1639Prioritizing CoS and DSCP By default, the DSCP field in Layer 3 packets and the CoS field in Layer 2 fra

Seite 713

Chapter 8: Basic Switch Management Commands164SHOW BAUD-RATESyntaxshow baud-rateParametersNoneModeUser Exec mode and Privileged Exec modeDescriptionUs

Seite 714

Chapter 98: Quality of Service (QoS)1640Allied Telesis recommends using the default mappings listed in Table 207 on page 1639 and Table 208, “DSCP Def

Seite 715 - Displaying Static Port Trunks

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1641Creating Single-rate and Twin-rate PolicersA policer can be used to meter the traffic classified by a cl

Seite 716

Chapter 98: Quality of Service (QoS)1642Creating a Single-rate PolicerThe following example configures a single-rate policer requiring traffic to conf

Seite 717 - Static Port Trunk Commands

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1643awplus(config-pmap-c)# police twin-rate 10000 2000 30000 50000 action policed-dscp-transmitConfigures a

Seite 718 - NO STATIC-CHANNEL-GROUP

Chapter 98: Quality of Service (QoS)1644Creating an Aggregate PolicerAn aggregate policer is a named policer with an aggregate name that you can assig

Seite 719 - PORT-CHANNEL LOAD-BALANCE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1645awplus mls qos aggregate-police policyagg1 single-rate 125 30000 60000 action policed-dscp-transmitCreat

Seite 720

Chapter 98: Quality of Service (QoS)1646awplus(config-pmap-c)# police aggregate policyagg1Associates an aggregate name “policyagg1” with class map “cm

Seite 721 - SHOW STATIC-CHANNEL-GROUP

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1647Configuring the Egress QueuesThis section discusses a port’s egress queues, including how incoming data

Seite 722 - STATIC-CHANNEL-GROUP

Chapter 98: Quality of Service (QoS)1648Determining theEgress QueuesThere are eight egress queues allocated to each egress port. The egress queue that

Seite 723

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1649The following example sets ingress traffic with a CoS value of 5 to egress on queue 7 of port 8:Table 21

Seite 724

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide165SHOW CLOCKSyntaxshow clockParametersNoneModesUser Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to display the sys

Seite 725 - Chapter 49

Chapter 98: Quality of Service (QoS)1650The following example sets ingress traffic with a DSCP value of 5 to egress on queue 7 of port 5:Table 217. Se

Seite 726

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1651awplus# show mls qos maps dscp-queue interface port 1.0.5Displays the DSCP mapping for port 5. See below

Seite 727 - Load Distribution

Chapter 98: Quality of Service (QoS)1652The following example uses the SET QUEUE command to set the traffic classified by class map “cmap4” to queue 6

Seite 728

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1653There are two commands that allow you to set egress queue shaping on a port. See Table 219.Both of these

Seite 729 - Creating New Aggregators

Chapter 98: Quality of Service (QoS)1654awplus(config-if)# wrr-queue weight 15,14,13,12,11,10,9,8Sets port 17 to the Weighted Round Robin scheduling m

Seite 730

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1655Enabling Auto-QoS Support on the SwitchNoteQoS and LLDP must be manually enabled globally before the Aut

Seite 731 - Adding Ports to Aggregators

Chapter 98: Quality of Service (QoS)1656Auto-QoS MacroExamplesYou can use the AUTO-QOS command to support a voice VLAN and optionally specify to trust

Seite 732

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1657awplus (config)# mls qos map cos-queue 0 to 1Maps CoS priority 0 to egress queue 1.awplus (config)# mls

Seite 733 - Deleting Aggregators

Chapter 98: Quality of Service (QoS)1658Auto-QoS with Trust DSCP Functionality and Voice VLAN Support In the following example, VLAN 100 becomes the v

Seite 734 - Displaying Aggregators

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1659Auto-QoS Functionality In the following example, the CoS value of ingress traffic is trusted:awplus>

Seite 735

Chapter 8: Basic Switch Management Commands166SHOW RUNNING-CONFIGSyntaxshow running-configParametersNoneModesPrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this c

Seite 736

Chapter 98: Quality of Service (QoS)1660Auto-QoS with Trust DSCP Functionality In the following example, VLAN 100 becomes the voice VLAN, and trust DS

Seite 737 - LACP Commands

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1661Auto-QoS-MEDMacro ExamplesNoteLLDP must be enabled globally before Auto-QoS-MED configuration. Link Laye

Seite 738 - CHANNEL-GROUP

Chapter 98: Quality of Service (QoS)1662NoteUnlike the other procedures in this chapter, the Auto-QoS-MED examples provide a list of commands, but do

Seite 739

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1663Auto-QoS-MED with Trust DSCP Functionality and Voice VLAN Support In the following example, VLAN 100 bec

Seite 740 - LACP SYSTEM-PRIORITY

Chapter 98: Quality of Service (QoS)1664Table 227. Auto-QoS MED with Trust DSCP Functionality & Voice VLAN Support ExampleCommand Descriptionawplu

Seite 741 - NO CHANNEL-GROUP

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1665Auto-QoS-MED Functionality ExampleIn the following example, the CoS value of ingress traffic is trusted:

Seite 742

Chapter 98: Quality of Service (QoS)1666Auto-QoS-MED with Trust DSCP Functionality In the following example, the DSCP value of ingress traffic is trus

Seite 743

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1667awplus (config-pmap)# class trustdscpEnters the “trustdscp” class map.awplus (config-pmap-c)# trust dscp

Seite 744 - SHOW ETHERCHANNEL

Chapter 98: Quality of Service (QoS)1668Displaying QoS SettingsThere are eight commands that display the QoS settings. See Table 230 for a description

Seite 745 - SHOW ETHERCHANNEL DETAIL

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1669Displaying QoSStatusTo display the status of the QoS feature, use the SHOW MLS QOS command at the Global

Seite 746 - Chapter 50: LACP Commands

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide167SHOW SWITCHSyntaxshow switchParametersNoneModesPrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to view th

Seite 747 - SHOW ETHERCHANNEL SUMMARY

Chapter 98: Quality of Service (QoS)1670Displaying aPolicy MapTo display the contents of a policy map, use the SHOW POLICY-MAP command in the Privileg

Seite 748 - SHOW LACP SYS-ID

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1671Figure 257. SHOW MLS QOS INTERFACE Command— Strict PriorityDisplaying CoS toQueue MappingsTo display the

Seite 749 - SHOW PORT ETHERCHANNEL

Chapter 98: Quality of Service (QoS)1672The CoS values in the first line are matched with the egress queue assignments in the second line. For example

Seite 750

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1673Figure 259. SHOW MLS QOS MAPS DSCP-QUEUE CommandDisplaying DSCPto Policed-DSCPValuesTo display the mappi

Seite 751 - Spanning Tree Protocols

Chapter 98: Quality of Service (QoS)1674The syntax of the SHOW MLS QOS MAPS POLICED-DSCP command is: show mls qos maps policed-dscp <0-63>See Fi

Seite 752

1675Chapter 99Quality of Service (QoS) CommandsThe Quality of Service (QoS) commands are summarized in Table 231 and described in detail in this chapt

Seite 753 - STP, RSTP and MSTP Protocols

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1676“MATCH TCP-FLAGS” on page 1704 Class Map Sets one or more TCP flags for a class map.“MATCH VLAN” on p

Seite 754

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1677“POLICE SINGLE-RATE ACTION” on page 1733Policy Map ClassConfigures a single-rate policer for a class map

Seite 755

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1678“WRR-QUEUE EGRESS-RATE-LIMIT QUEUES” on page 1760Interface ConfigurationSets a limit on the amount of

Seite 756 - Path Costs and Port Costs

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1679AUTO-QOS Syntaxauto-qos [voice <VLANID> |trust dscp]ParametersvoiceSpecifies a VLAN ID for voice V

Seite 757 - Port Priority

Chapter 8: Basic Switch Management Commands168ExampleThe following example displays the switch information:awplus# show switchActive Spanning Tree ver

Seite 758

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1680In the following example, VLAN 50 becomes the voice VLAN on port 1.0.22, and DSCP is trusted on traff

Seite 759

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1681AUTO-QOS-MEDSyntaxauto-qos-med [voice <VLANID> |trust dscp]ParametersvoiceSpecifies a VLAN ID for

Seite 760 - Point-to-Point and Edge Ports

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1682In the following example, VLAN 50 becomes the voice VLAN on port 1.0.14, and DSCP is trusted on traff

Seite 761

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1683CLASSSyntaxclass name|defaultParametersnameIndicates the name of a class map.defaultIndicates the class-

Seite 762 - Mixed STP and RSTP Networks

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1684To delete an association between a class map called “cmap5” and policy map called “pmap1,” do the fol

Seite 763 - Spanning Tree and VLANs

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1685CLASS-MAPSyntaxclass-map nameParametersnameSpecifies the name of a class map.ModeGlobal Configuration mo

Seite 764 - RSTP and MSTP BPDU Guard

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1686DEFAULT-ACTIONSyntaxdefault-action permit|deny|copy-to-mirrorParameterspermitSpecifies packets are pe

Seite 765

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1687To reset the action for the default class-map to permit, do the following:awplus> enableawplus# confi

Seite 766 - STP, RSTP, MSTP Loop Guard

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1688DESCRIPTION (Policy Map)Syntaxdescription lineParameterslineSpecifies an 80-character description of

Seite 767

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1689To remove a description from a policy map called “pmap1,” do the following:awplus> enableawplus# conf

Seite 768

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide169SHOW SYSTEMSyntaxshow systemParametersNoneModesUser Exec and Privileged Exec modesDescriptionUse this com

Seite 769

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1690MATCH ACCESS-GROUP Syntaxmatch access-group group-name|group-numberParametersgroup-nameIndicates a gr

Seite 770

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1691 To create a numbered IPv4 ACL, see the commands listed in Table 232.Use the no form of this command, N

Seite 771 - STP and RSTP Root Guard

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1692The following example creates a numbered IPv4 MAC ACL access list, 4012 and matches it to a class map

Seite 772

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1693MATCH COSSyntaxmatch cos <0-7>Parameters0-7Specifies the CoS value where 0 is the lowest value, an

Seite 773 - Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1694Confirmation Commands“SHOW CLASS-MAP” on page 1744“SHOW RUNNING-CONFIG” on page 166ExamplesThe follow

Seite 774

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1695MATCH DSCPSyntaxmatch dscp <0-63>Parameters0-63Specifies the DSCP value with 0 as the lowest value

Seite 775

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1696MATCH IP-PRECEDENCESyntaxmatch ip-precedence <0-7>Parameters0-7Specifies the precedence number.

Seite 776 - Setting the Switch Parameters

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1697MATCH MAC-TYPESyntaxmatch mac-type <12bcast|12mcast|12ucast>Parametersl2bcastSpecifies the Layer 2

Seite 777

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1698The following example removes the MAC type from a class map:awplus> enableawplus# configure termin

Seite 778 - Setting the Port Parameters

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1699MATCH PROTOCOLSyntaxmatch eth-format layer-two-format protocol layer-three-protocolParameterseth-formatI

Seite 779

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide17SPANNING-TREE ERRDISABLE-TIMEOUT ENABLE ...

Seite 780 - Displaying STP Settings

Chapter 8: Basic Switch Management Commands170SHOW SYSTEM SERIALNUMBERSyntaxshow system serialnumberParametersNoneModeUser Exec and Privileged Exec mo

Seite 781 - STP Commands

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1700snap-tagged Indicates Sub-network Access Protocol (SNAP) tagged packets.snap-untagged Indicates SNAP

Seite 782 - Chapter 53: STP Commands

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1701dec-lavc Indicates protocol number 6007. Enter the parameter name or its number.dec-mod-dump-id Indicate

Seite 783 - NO SPANNING-TREE STP ENABLE

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1702Confirmation Commands“SHOW CLASS-MAP” on page 1744“SHOW RUNNING-CONFIG” on page 166ExamplesThe follow

Seite 784 - SHOW SPANNING-TREE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1703The following example creates a class map called “cmap12” and assigns ARP to it:awplus> enableawplus#

Seite 785

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1704MATCH TCP-FLAGSSyntaxmatch tcp-flags ack|fin|rst|syn|urgParametersackIndicates the Acknowledge TCP fl

Seite 786 - SPANNING-TREE FORWARD-TIME

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1705If you assign both of these commands to the same class map, such as “cmap1,” the output of the SHOW CLAS

Seite 787 - SPANNING-TREE GUARD ROOT

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1706MATCH VLANSyntaxmatch vlan <1-4094>Parameters1-4094Specifies the VLAN ID number.ModeClass Map C

Seite 788 - SPANNING-TREE HELLO-TIME

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1707MLS QOS AGGREGATE-POLICE SINGLE-RATESyntaxmls qos aggregate-police <name> single-rate <CIR>

Seite 789 - SPANNING-TREE MAX-AGE

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1708This type of policer can meter the traffic classified by the class map, and as a result, is given a r

Seite 790 - SPANNING-TREE MODE STP

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1709awplus(config-pmap)# police aggregate policeagg1awplus(config-pmap-c)# exitawplus(config-pmap)# class cm

Seite 791 - SPANNING-TREE PATH-COST

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide171SHOW USERSSyntaxshow usersParametersNoneModesPrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to display t

Seite 792 - SPANNING-TREE PORTFAST

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1710MLS QOS AGGREGATE-POLICE TWIN-RATESyntaxmls qos aggregate-police <name> twin-rate <cir> &

Seite 793

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1711A twin-rate policier is based on four values:  minimum rate minimum burst size maximum rate maximum

Seite 794

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1712awplus(config-pmap-c)# exitawplus(config-pmap)# class cmaptwin2awplus(config-pmap)# police aggregate

Seite 795

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1713MLS QOS COSSyntaxmls qos cos <0-7>Parameters0-7Specifies the Class of Service user-priority value.

Seite 796 - SPANNING-TREE STP ENABLE

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1714The following example sets the CoS priority value to 4 on port 22:awplus> enableawplus# configure

Seite 797

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1715MLS QOS ENABLESyntaxmls qos enableParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command

Seite 798

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1716MLS QOS MAP COS-QUEUESyntaxmls qos map cos-queue cos_priority to egress_queueParameterscos_prioritySp

Seite 799

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1717Confirmation Command“SHOW MLS QOS MAPS COS-QUEUE” on page 1753ExamplesThe following example sets an egre

Seite 800 - Hello Time, and

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1718MLS QOS MAP DSCP-QUEUESyntaxmls qos map dscp-queue dscp_value to egress_queueParametersdscp_valueSpec

Seite 801 - Disabling BPDU

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1719ExamplesThe following example maps a DSCP value of 46 to egress queue 7 on ingress port 1.0.24. The DSCP

Seite 802

Chapter 8: Basic Switch Management Commands172ExampleThis example displays the managers who are logged on to the switch:awplus# show usersIdle The num

Seite 803 - Configuring Port

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1720MLS QOS MAP POLICED-DSCPSyntaxmls qos map policed-dscp <existing-dscp> to <new-dscp> <

Seite 804

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1721This example changes the DSCP value from 20 to 44:awplus> enableawplus# configure terminalawplus(conf

Seite 805

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1722NO AUTO-QOS VOICE | TRUST DSCPSyntaxno auto-qos [voice <VLANID> |trust dscp]ParametersvoiceSpec

Seite 806

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1723In the following example, DSCP is removed as the type of trust:awplus> enableawplus# configure termin

Seite 807

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1724NO MATCH ACCESS-GROUPSyntaxmatch access-group group-name|group-numberParametersgroup-nameIndicates an

Seite 808 - Displaying RSTP Settings

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1725The following example removes group number 4000 from a class map, called “cmap41”:awplus> enableawplu

Seite 809 - RSTP Commands

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1726NO MATCH PROTOCOLSyntaxno match eth-format layer-two-format protocol layer-three-protocolParameterset

Seite 810 - Chapter 55: RSTP Commands

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1727The following example removes 802.2 tagged packets from a class map called “cmap8”:awplus> enableawpl

Seite 811 - NO SPANNING-TREE PORTFAST

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1728NO MLS QOS AGGREGATE-POLICESyntaxno mls qos aggregate-police name ParametersnameIndicates the name of

Seite 812

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1729NO MLS QOS ENABLESyntaxno mls qos enableParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this c

Seite 813 - NO SPANNING-TREE LOOP-GUARD

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide173SHOW VERSIONSyntaxshow versionParametersNoneModeUser Exec and Privileged Exec modesDescriptionUse this co

Seite 814

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1730NO POLICE AGGREGATESyntaxno police aggregate nameParametersnameIndicates the name of a police aggrega

Seite 815 - NO SPANNING-TREE RSTP ENABLE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1731POLICE AGGREGATESyntaxpolice aggregate nameParametersnameIndicates the name of the police aggregator.Mod

Seite 816

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1732The following example removes the association between the aggregate name, “policyagg5,” and class map

Seite 817

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1733POLICE SINGLE-RATE ACTIONSyntaxpolice single-rate <cir> <cbs> <ebs> action [drop-red|p

Seite 818

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1734POLICED-DSCP command. See “MLS QOS MAP POLICED-DSCP” on page 1720.Although data are metered per byte,

Seite 819

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1735POLICE TWIN-RATE ACTIONSyntaxpolice twin-rate <cir> <cbs> <pir> <pbs> action [dr

Seite 820

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1736 minimum burst size maximum rate maximum burst sizeThe value of the action parameter greatly effec

Seite 821

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1737POLICY-MAPSyntaxpolicy-map nameParametersnameSpecifies the name of a policy map.ModeGlobal Configuration

Seite 822

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1738SET COSSyntaxset cos <0-7>Parameters0-7Specifies the CoS value of the classified traffic.ModePo

Seite 823 - SPANNING-TREE LINK-TYPE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1739The following example removes the policy-map action for class map “cmap25” by using the NO SET COS comma

Seite 824 - SPANNING-TREE LOOP-GUARD

Chapter 8: Basic Switch Management Commands174SNMP-SERVER CONTACTSyntaxsnmp-server contact contactParameterscontactSpecifies the name of the person re

Seite 825

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1740SET DSCPSyntaxset dscp <0-63>Parameters<0-63>Specifies the DSCP value of the classified t

Seite 826 - SPANNING-TREE MODE RSTP

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1741SET QUEUESyntaxset queue <0-7>Parameters<0-7>Specifies the queue.ModePolicy Map Class modeDe

Seite 827

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1742The following example removes the previously configured egress queue from class map “cmap2:”awplus>

Seite 828

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1743SERVICE-POLICY INPUTSyntaxservice-policy input <policy-map>Parameterspolicy-mapIndicates the name

Seite 829

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1744SHOW CLASS-MAPSyntaxshow class-map class-map-nameParametersclass-map-nameSpecifies the name of the cl

Seite 830

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1745SHOW POLICY-MAPSyntaxshow policy-map policy-map-nameParameterspolicy-map-nameSpecifies the name of the p

Seite 831

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1746ExampleThis example displays the settings of a policy map called “pmap4:'awplus# show policy-map

Seite 832 - SPANNING-TREE RSTP ENABLE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1747SHOW MLS QOSSyntaxshow mls qos ParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to disp

Seite 833 - Chapter 56

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1748SHOW MLS QOS AGGREGRATE-POLICERSyntaxshow mls qos aggregate-policer nameParametersnameSpecifies the n

Seite 834

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1749.ExampleThis example displays the contents of the aggregate policer, called “ap1:”awplus# show mls qos a

Seite 835

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide175SNMP-SERVER LOCATIONSyntaxsnmp-server location locationParameterslocationSpecifies the location of the sw

Seite 836

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1750SHOW MLS QOS INTERFACESyntaxshow mls qos interface portParametersportSpecifies the port to display. Y

Seite 837

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1751Figure 268. SHOW MLS QOS INTERFACE Command - Strict Priority (continued)Figure 269 is an example of a po

Seite 838 - MSTI Guidelines

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1752The fields in the display are described in Table 238.ExampleThis example displays the mappings of egr

Seite 839 - VLAN and MSTI Associations

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1753SHOW MLS QOS MAPS COS-QUEUESyntaxshow mls qos maps cos-queueParametersportSpecifies the port to display.

Seite 840 - Ports in Multiple MSTIs

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1754SHOW MLS QOS MAPS DSCP-QUEUESyntaxshow mls qos maps dscp-queueParametersportSpecifies the port. You c

Seite 841

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1755Figure 271. SHOW MLS QOS MAPS DSCP-QUEUE CommandThe mappings of DSCP value and egress queues are set wit

Seite 842

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1756ExampleThe following example displays the DSCP mappings:awplus# show mls qos maps dscp-queue

Seite 843

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1757SHOW MLS QOS MAPS POLICED-DSCPSyntaxshow mls qos maps policed-dscp <0-63>Parameters<0-63>Spe

Seite 844

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1758TRUST DSCPSyntaxtrust dscpParametersNoneModePolicy Map Class modeDescriptionUse this command to trust

Seite 845

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1759awplus> enableawplus# configure terminalawplus(config)# policy-map pmap1awplus(config-pmap)# class cm

Seite 846 - Summary of Guidelines

Chapter 8: Basic Switch Management Commands176SYSTEM TERRITORYSyntaxsystem territory territoryParametersterritorySpecifies the territory of the switch

Seite 847

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1760WRR-QUEUE EGRESS-RATE-LIMIT QUEUESSyntaxwrr-queue egress-rate-limit bandwidth queues [0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7

Seite 848 - Associating VLANs to MSTIs

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1761This example removes egress rate limiting from port 14:awplus> enableawplus# configure terminalawplus

Seite 849

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1762WRR-QUEUE WEIGHTSyntaxwrr-queue weight weightParametersweightSpecifies the weight (the number of pack

Seite 850

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1763Figure 274. Mapping of WRR QueuesUse the no form of this command, NO WRR-QUEUE WEIGHT, to remove the WRR

Seite 851

Chapter 99: Quality of Service (QoS) Commands1764

Seite 852 - MSTP Root Guard

1765Chapter 100QoS Storm Control ProtectionThis chapter describes the following topics: “Overview” on page 1766 “Enabling Policy-Based QSP” on page

Seite 853 - MSTP Commands

Chapter 100: QoS Storm Control Protection1766OverviewThe QoS Storm Control Protection (QSP) feature uses QoS mechanisms to classify traffic that is li

Seite 854 - Chapter 57: MSTP Commands

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1767The QSP feature is configured and displayed with six storm control commands. All of the commands that be

Seite 855 - INSTANCE MSTI-ID PRIORITY

Chapter 100: QoS Storm Control Protection1768When the software detects a storm on a port, a message is automatically recorded in the Event log or Sysl

Seite 856

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1769Enabling Policy-Based QSPTo enable QSP, use the STORM PROTECTION command. You enable storm protection on

Seite 857 - INSTANCE MSTI-ID VLAN

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide177This example removes the current territory information:awplus> enableawplus# configure terminalawplus(

Seite 858

Chapter 100: QoS Storm Control Protection1770Setting the Storm Control ActionTo determine which action the switch takes when the configured limits are

Seite 859

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1771Disabling a Port The following example sets the storm protection action to disable the port assigned to

Seite 860 - NO SPANNING-TREE MSTP ENABLE

Chapter 100: QoS Storm Control Protection1772Shutting Down aPortThe following example sets the storm protection action to shut down the port assigned

Seite 861

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1773Setting Storm Control Down TimeAfter the storm control action has been triggered, the port assigned to t

Seite 862 - SHOW SPANNING-TREE MST CONFIG

Chapter 100: QoS Storm Control Protection1774Setting the Storm Control Speed and Sampling FrequencyYou want to set the data rate for triggering policy

Seite 863 - SHOW SPANNING-TREE MST

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1775Displaying Port Storm StatusTo display the storm status for the specified port, use the SHOW MLS QOS INT

Seite 864

Chapter 100: QoS Storm Control Protection1776

Seite 865

1777Chapter 101QSP CommandsThe QoS Storm Control Protection commands are summarized in Table 247 and described in detail in this chapter.Table 247. Qu

Seite 866

Chapter 101: QSP Commands1778SHOW MLS QOS INTERFACE STORM-STATUSSyntaxshow mls qos interface port storm-statusParametersportSpecifies the port to disp

Seite 867

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1779Confirmation CommandNoneExampleThis example displays the storm status for port 5:awplus# show mls qos in

Seite 868 - SPANNING-TREE MODE MSTP

Chapter 8: Basic Switch Management Commands178

Seite 869 - SPANNING-TREE MSTP ENABLE

Chapter 101: QSP Commands1780STORM-ACTIONSyntaxstorm-action portdisable|vlandisable|linkdownParametersportdisableDisables the port in software.vlandis

Seite 870

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1781awplus(config)# policy-map pmap2awplus(config-pmap)# class cmap1awplus(config-pmap-c)# storm-protectiona

Seite 871 - SPANNING-TREE MST INSTANCE

Chapter 101: QSP Commands1782STORM-DOWNTIMESyntaxstorm-downtime <1 - 86400>Parameters<1 - 86400>Indicates the number of seconds.ModePolicy

Seite 872

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1783STORM-PROTECTIONSyntaxstorm-protection ParametersNoneModePolicy Map ClassDescriptionUse this command to

Seite 873

Chapter 101: QSP Commands1784STORM-RATESyntaxstorm-rate <1 - 10000000>Parameters<1 - 10000000>Sets the data rate in kbps. ModePolicy Map C

Seite 874

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1785The following example disables the storm-rate setting:awplus> enableawplus# configure terminalawplus(

Seite 875 - <region-name>

Chapter 101: QSP Commands1786STORM-WINDOWSyntaxstorm-window <100 - 6000>Parameters<100 - 6000>Indicates the window size, measured in ms. E

Seite 876 - REVISION

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1787The following example disables the storm-window setting on class map “cmap5:'awplus> enableawplu

Seite 877 - Virtual LANs

Chapter 101: QSP Commands1788

Seite 878

1789Section XIVRoutingThis section contains the following chapters: Chapter 102, “Internet Protocol Version 4 Packet Routing” on page 1791 Chapter 1

Seite 879 - Port-based and Tagged VLANs

179Chapter 9Port ParametersThis chapter contains the following: “Adding Descriptions” on page 180 “Setting the Speed and Duplex Mode” on page 181 “

Seite 881 -  Tagged VLANs

1791Chapter 102Internet Protocol Version 4 Packet RoutingThis chapter describes the following topics: “Overview” on page 1792 “Routing Interfaces” o

Seite 882 - Port-based VLAN Overview

Chapter 102: Internet Protocol Version 4 Packet Routing1792OverviewThis section contains an overview of the IPv4 routing feature on the switch and beg

Seite 883 - Identifier

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1793Routing InterfacesRouting interfaces are used to route IPv4 packets between the networks that are local

Seite 884

Chapter 102: Internet Protocol Version 4 Packet Routing1794Static RoutesStatic routes are used to route IPv4 packets to networks that are not directly

Seite 885 - Example 1

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1795Routing Information Protocol (RIP)The switch supports Routing Information Protocol (RIP) versions 1 and

Seite 886 - Example 2

Chapter 102: Internet Protocol Version 4 Packet Routing1796The switch transmits its routing table every thirty seconds from those interfaces that have

Seite 887

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1797Default RouteA default route is a “match all” destination entry in the routing table. The switch uses it

Seite 888 - Tagged VLAN Overview

Chapter 102: Internet Protocol Version 4 Packet Routing1798Routing TableThe switch has a routing table of local and remote networks The local networks

Seite 889

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1799Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) TableThe switch has an ARP table. The switch uses the table to store t

Seite 890 - Tagged VLAN

Contents18Section VIII: Virtual LANs ...

Seite 891

Chapter 9: Port Parameters180Adding DescriptionsThe ports will be easier to identify if you give them descriptions. The descriptions are viewed with t

Seite 892

Chapter 102: Internet Protocol Version 4 Packet Routing1800Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP)ICMP allows routers to send error and control messa

Seite 893 - Creating VLANs

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1801Time to Live Exceeded (11) The switch sends a “Time to live exceeded” packet if the value in a packet’s

Seite 894

Chapter 102: Internet Protocol Version 4 Packet Routing1802Routing Interfaces and Management FeaturesRouting interfaces are primarily used to route IP

Seite 895

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1803Example of the Routing CommandsThis section contains an example of the commands of the IPv4 routing feat

Seite 896 - Adding Tagged Ports to VLANs

Chapter 102: Internet Protocol Version 4 Packet Routing1804Creating theRoutingInterfacesNow that the VLANs are created, you may use the IP ADDRESS com

Seite 897

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1805IPv4 decimal masks 16 and 24 are equivalent to masks 255.255.0.0 and 255.255.255.0, respectively.There a

Seite 898

Chapter 102: Internet Protocol Version 4 Packet Routing1806Adding Static andDefault RoutesBuilding on our example, assume you decide to manually enter

Seite 899

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1807Now assume you want to create a default route for packets that have a destination address to an unknown

Seite 900 - Deleting VLANs

Chapter 102: Internet Protocol Version 4 Packet Routing1808Activating RIP Rather than adding static routes to remote destinations, or perhaps to augme

Seite 901 - Displaying the VLANs

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1809You may specify the interfaces in the NETWORK command by their respective network addresses instead of t

Seite 902

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide181Setting the Speed and Duplex ModeThe twisted pair ports on the switch can operate at 10, 100, or 1000 Mbp

Seite 903 - Port-based and Tagged VLAN

Chapter 102: Internet Protocol Version 4 Packet Routing1810

Seite 904 - NO SWITCHPORT ACCESS VLAN

1811Chapter 103IPv4 Routing CommandsThe IPv4 routing commands are summarized in Table 251 and described in detail within the chapter.NoteThe commands

Seite 905 - NO SWITCHPORT TRUNK

Chapter 103: IPv4 Routing Commands1812NoteThe switch does not support IPv6 packet routing, but it does support one IPv6 management address. For instru

Seite 906

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1813IP ADDRESSSyntaxip address ipaddress/maskParametersipaddressSpecifies an IPv4 address for a new routing

Seite 907

Chapter 103: IPv4 Routing Commands1814ExamplesThis example adds a new routing interface to the Default VLAN, which has the VID 1.The interface is assi

Seite 908 - SHOW VLAN

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1815IP ADDRESS DHCPSyntaxip address dhcpParametersNoneModeVLAN Interface modeDescriptionUse this command to

Seite 909

Chapter 103: IPv4 Routing Commands1816IP ROUTESyntaxip route ipaddress1 mask ipaddress2 [admin]Parametersipaddress1Specifies the IP address of a remot

Seite 910 - SWITCHPORT ACCESS VLAN

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1817The switch uses the default route to route packets to remote destination networks that are not listed in

Seite 911

Chapter 103: IPv4 Routing Commands1818This example assigns the switch the IPv4 default gateway address 143.87.132.45. The mask is specified in IP nota

Seite 912 - SWITCHPORT MODE ACCESS

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1819NO IP ADDRESSSyntaxno ip addressParametersNoneModeVLAN Interface modeDescriptionUse this command to dele

Seite 913 - SWITCHPORT MODE TRUNK

Chapter 9: Port Parameters182This example sets the speeds of ports 11 and 17 to 100Mbps:awplus> enableawplus# configure terminalawplus(config)# int

Seite 914

Chapter 103: IPv4 Routing Commands1820ExampleThis example deletes the IPv4 routing interface from the VLAN with the VID 15:awplus> enableawplus# co

Seite 915 - SWITCHPORT TRUNK ALLOWED VLAN

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1821NO IP ADDRESS DHCPSyntaxno ip address dhcpParametersNoneModeVLAN Interface modeDescriptionUse this comma

Seite 916

Chapter 103: IPv4 Routing Commands1822ExampleThis example deletes the IPv4 routing interface with a dynamic IP address from the VLAN with the VID 3:aw

Seite 917

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1823NO IP ROUTESyntaxno ip route ipaddress1/mask ipaddress2 [admin]Parametersipaddress1Specifies the IP addr

Seite 918 - SWITCHPORT TRUNK NATIVE VLAN

Chapter 103: IPv4 Routing Commands1824This example deletes the same static route, but the mask is entered in decimal notation:awplus> enableawplus#

Seite 919

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1825SHOW IP INTERFACESyntaxshow ip interfaceParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this comman

Seite 920

Chapter 103: IPv4 Routing Commands1826ExampleThis example displays the routing interfaces on the switch:awplus# show ip interfaceProtocol The status o

Seite 921

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1827SHOW IP ROUTESyntaxshow ip routeParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to dis

Seite 922

Chapter 103: IPv4 Routing Commands1828NoteRIP routes have an additional option which indicates the time lapsed in hours: minutes: seconds since the RI

Seite 923 - Chapter 60

1829Chapter 104Routing Information Protocol (RIP)This chapter describes the following topics: “Overview” on page 1830 “Enabling RIP” on page 1831 “

Seite 924

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide183Setting the MDI/MDI-X Wiring ConfigurationThe wiring configurations of twisted pair ports that operate at

Seite 925 - Figure 172. GVRP Example

Chapter 104: Routing Information Protocol (RIP)1830OverviewThe AT-FS970M Series switches provide Layer 3 routing functionality as well as Layer 2 swit

Seite 926

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1831Enabling RIPTo connect remote networks dynamically, you must enable the RIP routing process on the switc

Seite 927

Chapter 104: Routing Information Protocol (RIP)1832The following example enables RIP on Switch S1 so that VLAN interfaces 10 and 50 receive and send R

Seite 928 - GVRP and Network Security

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1833Specifying a RIP VersionThe Management Software supports both RIP Version 1 and 2. The default RIP Versi

Seite 929

Chapter 104: Routing Information Protocol (RIP)1834Enabling AuthenticationSecurity is one of the primary requirements for corporate networks. RIP Vers

Seite 930 - Enabling GVRP on the Switch

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1835The following example configures Switch S1 to specify MD5 as the authentication mode and “axc222” as the

Seite 931 - Enabling GIP on the Switch

Chapter 104: Routing Information Protocol (RIP)1836Enabling and Disabling Automatic Route SummarizationAs a corporation grows, the corporate network n

Seite 932 - Enabling GVRP on the Ports

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1837The following example enables automatic summarization:S1> enableS1# configure terminalS1(config)# rou

Seite 933 - Setting the GVRP Timers

Chapter 104: Routing Information Protocol (RIP)1838Enabling and Disabling Split HorizonRIP implements the split-horizon mechanism to prevent propagati

Seite 934

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1839Advertising the Default RouteRIP has a built-in feature which allows you to advertise a default route to

Seite 935 - Disabling GVRP on the Ports

Chapter 9: Port Parameters184Enabling or Disabling PortsDisabling ports turns off their receivers and transmitters so that they cannot forward traffic

Seite 936 - Disabling GIP on the Switch

Chapter 104: Routing Information Protocol (RIP)1840Displaying Routing Information with RIPTo confirm that routes are dynamically added by RIP, use the

Seite 937 - Disabling GVRP on the Switch

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1841Adjusting TimersRIP sends routing updates at regular intervals. By default, the Management Software tran

Seite 938

Chapter 104: Routing Information Protocol (RIP)1842Blocking Routing Updates on an InterfaceThe interfaces on the switch receive routing updates every

Seite 939 - Displaying GVRP

1843Chapter 105Routing Information Protocol (RIP) CommandsThe RIP commands are summarized in Table 256 and described in detail within the chapter.Tabl

Seite 940

Chapter 105: Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Commands1844“NO AUTO-SUMMARY” on page 1859 Routing ConfigurationDisables automatic route summarization

Seite 941

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1845“ROUTER RIP” on page 1874 Global ConfigurationEnters the Routing Configuration mode to configure RIP.“SH

Seite 942

Chapter 105: Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Commands1846AUTO-SUMMARYSyntaxauto-summaryParametersNoneModeRouting Configuration modeDescriptionUse t

Seite 943 - CONVERT DYNAMIC VLAN

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1847DEFAULT-INFORMATION ORIGINATESyntaxdefault-information originateParameterNoneModeRouter Configuration mo

Seite 944 - GVRP APPLICANT STATE ACTIVE

Chapter 105: Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Commands1848IP RIP AUTHENTICATION STRINGSyntaxip rip authentication string auth-stringParametersauth-s

Seite 945 - GVRP APPLICANT STATE NORMAL

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1849IP RIP AUTHENTICATION MODESyntaxip rip authentication mode md5|textParametersmd5Specifies the MD5 authen

Seite 946 - GVRP ENABLE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide185Enabling or Disabling BackpressurePorts use backpressure during periods of packet congestion, to prevent

Seite 947 - GVRP REGISTRATION

Chapter 105: Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Commands1850IP RIP RECEIVE-PACKETSyntaxip rip receive-packetParametersNoneModeVLAN Interface modeDescr

Seite 948 - GVRP TIMER JOIN

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1851IP RIP RECEIVE VERSIONSyntaxip rip receive version 1|2|1 2Parameters1Specifies RIP Version 1.2Specifies

Seite 949 - GVRP TIMER LEAVE

Chapter 105: Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Commands1852The following example configures the routing interface in VLAN 3 to receive both RIP Versi

Seite 950 - GVRP TIMER LEAVEALL

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1853IP RIP SEND-PACKETSyntaxip rip send packetParametersNoneModeVLAN Interface modeDescriptionUse this comma

Seite 951 - NO GVRP ENABLE

Chapter 105: Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Commands1854IP RIP SEND VERSIONSyntaxip rip send version 1|2Parameters1Specifies RIP Version 1.2Specif

Seite 952 - NO GVRP TIMER JOIN

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1855IP RIP SPLIT-HORIZONSyntaxip rip split-horizon [poisoned]ParameterspoisonedAssigns a hop value of infini

Seite 953 - NO GVRP TIMER LEAVE

Chapter 105: Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Commands1856ExamplesThe following example activates split horizon on the routing interface in VLAN 5.

Seite 954 - NO GVRP TIMER LEAVEALL

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1857NETWORKSyntaxnetwork network-address|subnet-mask|vlanidParametersnetwork-addressSpecifies the network ad

Seite 955 - PURGE GVRP

Chapter 105: Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Commands1858The following example allows VLAN 2 to send and accept routing updates:awplus> enableaw

Seite 956 - SHOW GVRP APPLICANT

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1859NO AUTO-SUMMARYSyntaxno auto-summaryParametersNoneModeRouting Configuration modeDescriptionUse this comm

Seite 957 - SHOW GVRP CONFIGURATION

Chapter 9: Port Parameters186Enabling or Disabling Flow ControlWhen a port that is operating in full-duplex mode needs to temporarily stop its local o

Seite 958 - SHOW GVRP MACHINE

Chapter 105: Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Commands1860NO DEFAULT-INFORMATION ORIGINATESyntaxno default-information originateParameterNoneModeRou

Seite 959 - SHOW GVRP STATISTICS

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1861NO IP RIP AUTHENTICATION MODESyntaxno ip rip authentication modeParametersNoneModeVLAN Interface modeDes

Seite 960 - Transmit GARP Messages: Empty

Chapter 105: Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Commands1862NO IP RIP AUTHENTICATION STRINGSyntaxno ip rip authentication string auth-stringParameters

Seite 961 - SHOW GVRP TIMER

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1863NO IP RIP RECEIVE-PACKETSyntaxno ip rip receive-packetParametersNoneModeVLAN Interface modeDescriptionUs

Seite 962

Chapter 105: Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Commands1864NO IP RIP RECEIVE VERSIONSyntaxno ip rip receive versionParametersNoneModeVLAN Interface m

Seite 963 - MAC Address-based VLANs

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1865NO IP RIP SEND-PACKETSyntaxno ip rip send packetParametersNoneModeVLAN Interface modeDescriptionUse this

Seite 964

Chapter 105: Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Commands1866NO IP RIP SEND VERSIONSyntaxno ip rip send versionParametersNoneModeVLAN Interface modeDes

Seite 965

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1867NO IP RIP SPLIT-HORIZONSyntaxno ip rip split-horizonParametersNoneModeVLAN Interface modeDescriptionUse

Seite 966

Chapter 105: Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Commands1868NO NETWORKSyntaxno network network-address|subnet-mask|vlanidParametersnetwork-addressSpec

Seite 967 - Switches

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1869NO PASSIVE-INTERFACESyntaxno passive-interface vlanidParametersvlanidSpecifies the ID number of a VLAN.M

Seite 968

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide187This example configures port 21 not to send pause packets during periods of packet congestion:awplus>

Seite 969

Chapter 105: Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Commands1870NO ROUTER RIPSyntaxno router ripParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse

Seite 970 - General Steps

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1871NO TIMERS BASICSyntaxno timers basicParametersNoneModeRouting Configuration modeDescriptionUse this comm

Seite 971

Chapter 105: Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Commands1872NO VERSIONSyntaxno versionParametersNoneModeRouter Configuration modeDescriptionUse this c

Seite 972

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1873PASSIVE-INTERFACESyntaxpassive-interface vlanidParametersvlanidSpecifies the ID number of a VLAN.ModeRou

Seite 973 - Removing MAC Addresses

Chapter 105: Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Commands1874ROUTER RIPSyntaxrouter ripParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this c

Seite 974

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1875SHOW IP RIPSyntaxshow ip ripParametersNoneModeUser Exec and Privileged Exec modesDescriptionUse this com

Seite 975 - Displaying VLANs

Chapter 105: Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Commands1876The fields are described in Table 257.ExampleThe following example displays routing inform

Seite 976

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1877SHOW IP RIP COUNTERSyntaxshow ip rip counterParametersNoneModeUser Exec and Privileged Exec modesDescrip

Seite 977

Chapter 105: Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Commands1878ExampleThe following example displays counters for RIP packets on the switch:awplus# show

Seite 978

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1879SHOW IP RIP INTERFACESyntaxshow ip rip interface interfaceParametersinterfaceSpecifies a VLAN interface.

Seite 979 - Chapter 63

Chapter 9: Port Parameters188If flow control is not configured on a port, this message is displayed:Flow control is not set on interface port1.0.2

Seite 980

Chapter 105: Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Commands1880ExamplesThe following example displays RIP information about VLAN 5:awplus# show ip route

Seite 981 - macaddress

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1881TIMERS BASICSyntaxtimers basic update update timeout timeout garbage garbageParametersupdateSpecifies th

Seite 982

Chapter 105: Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Commands1882ExampleThe following example sets the switch to transmit routing updates every 20 seconds,

Seite 983

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1883VERSIONSyntaxversion 1|2Parameters1Specifies RIP Version 1.2Specifies RIP Version 2.ModeRouter Configura

Seite 984 - SHOW VLAN MACADDRESS

Chapter 105: Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Commands1884

Seite 985

1885Appendix ASystem Monitoring CommandsThe system monitoring commands are summarized in Table 260 and described in detail within the chapter.Table 26

Seite 986 - VLAN MACADDRESS

Chapter : System Monitoring Commands1886SHOW CPUSyntaxshow cpu [sort pri|runtime|sleep|thrds]ParameterspriSorts the list by process priorities.runtime

Seite 987 - Sales and the VID 3:

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1887SHOW CPU HISTORYSyntaxshow cpu historyParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command

Seite 988

Chapter : System Monitoring Commands1888SHOW CPU USER-THREADSSyntaxshow cpu user-threadsParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this comm

Seite 989

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1889SHOW MEMORYSyntaxshow memory [sort peak|size|stk]ParameterspeakSorts the list by the peak amounts of mem

Seite 990

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide189Resetting PortsIf a port is experiencing a problem, you may be able to correct it with the RESET command

Seite 991

Chapter : System Monitoring Commands1890SHOW MEMORY ALLOCATIONSyntaxshow memory allocation processParameterprocessSpecifies a system process.ModePrivi

Seite 992

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1891SHOW MEMORY HISTORYSyntaxshow memory historyParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this co

Seite 993 - Private Port VLANs

Chapter : System Monitoring Commands1892SHOW MEMORY POOLSSyntaxshow memory poolsParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to d

Seite 994

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1893SHOW PROCESSSyntaxshow memory process [sort cpu|mem]ParameterscpuSorts the list by percentage of CPU uti

Seite 995 - Functionality

Chapter : System Monitoring Commands1894SHOW SYSTEM SERIALNUMBERSyntaxshow system serialnumberParametersNoneModesUser Exec mode and Privileged Exec mo

Seite 996

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1895SHOW SYSTEM INTERRUPTSSyntaxshow system interruptsParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse t

Seite 997 - Creating Private VLANs

Chapter : System Monitoring Commands1896SHOW TECH-SUPPORTSyntaxshow tech-support [all]ParametersallPerforms the full set of technical support commands

Seite 998 - Adding Host and Uplink Ports

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1897With the ALL option, the command performs the previous commands and these additional commands: SHOW ARP

Seite 999

Chapter : System Monitoring Commands1898

Seite 1000 - Displaying Private VLANs

1899Appendix BManagement Software Default SettingsThis appendix lists the factory default settings of the switch. The features are listed in alphabeti

Seite 1001 - Private Port VLAN Commands

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide19Chapter 61: GARP VLAN Registration Protocol Commands ...

Seite 1002

Chapter 9: Port Parameters190Configuring Threshold Limits for Ingress PacketsYou can set threshold limits for the ingress packets on the ports. The th

Seite 1003 - PRIVATE-VLAN

Appendix B: Management Software Default Settings1900 “Web Server” on page 1930

Seite 1004 - SHOW VLAN PRIVATE-VLAN

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1901Boot Configuration FileThe following table lists the name of the default configuration file.Boot Configu

Seite 1005

Appendix B: Management Software Default Settings1902Class of ServiceThe following table lists the default mappings of the IEEE 802.1p priority levels

Seite 1006

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1903Console PortThe following table lists the default settings for the Console port.NoteThe baud rate is the

Seite 1007 - Voice VLAN Commands

Appendix B: Management Software Default Settings1904DHCP RelayThe following table lists the default settings for the DHCP relay feature.DHCP Relay Set

Seite 1008 - NO SWITCHPORT VOICE VLAN

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1905802.1x Port-Based Network Access ControlThe following table describes the 802.1x Port-based Network Acce

Seite 1009 - SWITCHPORT VOICE DSCP

Appendix B: Management Software Default Settings1906The following table lists the default settings for RADIUS accounting.The following table lists the

Seite 1010 - SWITCHPORT VOICE VLAN

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1907Enhanced StackingThe following table lists the enhanced stacking default setting.Enhanced Stacking Setti

Seite 1011 - Confirmation Command

Appendix B: Management Software Default Settings1908GVRPThis section provides the default settings for GVRP.GVRP Setting DefaultStatus DisabledGIP Sta

Seite 1012

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1909IGMP SnoopingThe following table lists the IGMP Snooping default settings.IGMP Snooping Setting DefaultI

Seite 1013 - Port Security

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide191To remove threshold limits from the ports, use the NO STORM-CONTROL command, also in the Port Interface m

Seite 1014

Appendix B: Management Software Default Settings1910IGMP Snooping QuerierThe following table lists the IGMP snooping querier default settings.IGMP Sno

Seite 1015 - Chapter 67

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1911Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP and LLDP-MED)The following table lists the default settings for LLDP

Seite 1016 - Overview

Appendix B: Management Software Default Settings1912MAC Address-based Port SecurityThe following table lists the MAC address-based port security defau

Seite 1017

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1913MAC Address TableThe following table lists the default setting for the MAC address table.MAC Address Tab

Seite 1018 - Configuring Ports

Appendix B: Management Software Default Settings1914Management IP AddressThe following table lists the default settings for the management IP address.

Seite 1019

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1915Manager AccountThe following table lists the manager account default settings.NoteLogin names and passwo

Seite 1020

Appendix B: Management Software Default Settings1916Port SettingsThe following table lists the port configuration default settings.Port Configuration

Seite 1021

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1917RADIUS ClientThe following table lists the RADIUS configuration default settings.RADIUS Configuration Se

Seite 1022 - Displaying Port Settings

Appendix B: Management Software Default Settings1918Remote Manager Account AuthenticationThe following table describes the remote manager account auth

Seite 1023 - INTERFACE Command

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1919RMONThe following table lists the default settings for RMON collection histories. There are no default s

Seite 1024

Chapter 9: Port Parameters192Displaying Threshold Limit Settings on PortsTo display the threshold settings for the ingress packets on the ports, use t

Seite 1025 - Commands

Appendix B: Management Software Default Settings1920Secure Shell ServerThe following table lists the SSH default settings.NoteThe SSH port number is n

Seite 1026 - NO SWITCHPORT PORT-SECURITY

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1921sFlow AgentThe default settings for the sFlow agent are listed in this table.sFlow Agent Setting Default

Seite 1027

Appendix B: Management Software Default Settings1922Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMPv1, SNMPv2c and SNMPv3)The following table describes the d

Seite 1028 - SHOW PORT-SECURITY INTERFACE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1923Simple Network Time ProtocolThe following table lists the SNTP default settings.SNTP Setting DefaultSyst

Seite 1029

Appendix B: Management Software Default Settings1924Spanning Tree Protocols (STP, RSTP and MSTP)This section provides the default settings for STP and

Seite 1030

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1925MultipleSpanning TreeProtocolThe following table describes the RSTP default settings.Loop Guard Disabled

Seite 1031 - Parameter

Appendix B: Management Software Default Settings1926System NameThe default setting for the system name is listed in this table.System Name Setting Def

Seite 1032

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1927TACACS+ Client The following table lists the TACACS+ client configuration default settings.TACACS+ Clien

Seite 1033 - SWITCHPORT PORT-SECURITY

Appendix B: Management Software Default Settings1928Telnet ServerThe default settings for the Telnet server are listed in this table.NoteThe Telnet po

Seite 1034

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1929VLANsThis section provides the VLAN default settings.VLAN Setting DefaultDefault VLAN Name Default_VLAN

Seite 1035

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide193Reinitializing Auto-NegotiationIf you believe that a port set to Auto-Negotiation is not using the highes

Seite 1036

Appendix B: Management Software Default Settings1930Web ServerThe following table lists the web server default settings.Web Server Configuration Setti

Seite 1037

1931Command IndexAAAA ACCOUNTING LOGIN command 1475AAA ACCOUNTING LOGIN TACACS command 1475AAA AUTHENTICATION DOT1X DEFAULT GROUP command 1056AAA AUTH

Seite 1038

Index1932DOT1X CONTROL-DIRECTION command 1086DOT1X EAP command 1088DOT1X INITIALIZE INTERFACE command 1090DOT1X MAX-REAUTH-REQ command 1091DOT1X PORT-

Seite 1039 - Chapter 69

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1933IP RIP SEND-PACKET command 1853IP RIP SPLIT-HORIZON command 1855IP ROUTE command 299, 314, 1816IP SOURCE

Seite 1040

Index1934NO GROUP-LINK-CONTROL UPSTREAM command 499, 510NO GVRP ENABLE command 937, 951NO HOSTNAME command 156NO HTTPS SERVER command 1441NO INSTANCE

Seite 1041 - Authentication Process

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1935NO SET COS command 1738NO SET DSCP command 1740NO SET QUEUE command 1741NO SFLOW COLLECTOR IP command 11

Seite 1042 - Port Roles

Index1936RELOAD command 127, 161RENEGOTIATE command 193, 225RESET command 189, 226, 1840REVISION command 876RMON ALARM command 1322, 1335RMON COLLECTI

Seite 1043

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide1937SHOW LOCATION command 1222, 1225, 1226, 1228, 1296SHOW LOG command 111, 665, 682SHOW LOG CONFIG command

Seite 1044

Index1938827, 872SPANNING-TREE PORTFAST BPDU-GUARD command 829, 874SPANNING-TREE PORTFAST command 803, 828, 873SPANNING-TREE PRIORITY (Bridge Priority

Seite 1045

Chapter 9: Port Parameters194Restoring the Default SettingsTo restore the default settings on a port, use the PURGE command in the Port Interface mode

Seite 1046 -  Multi-supplicant mode

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide195Displaying Port SettingsThere are several ways to display port settings. See the following: “Displaying

Seite 1047

Chapter 9: Port Parameters196Figure 49. SHOW INTERFACE CommandThe fields are described in Table 13 on page 230. For a description of the command, see

Seite 1048 - Multi-Supplicant

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide197Displaying or Clearing Port StatisticsTo view packet statistics for the individual ports, use the SHOW PL

Seite 1049

Chapter 9: Port Parameters198Displaying SFP Information To view information on a plugged SFP on the switch, use the SHOW SYSTEM PLUGGABLE command in t

Seite 1050

199Chapter 10Port Parameter CommandsThe port parameter commands are summarized in Table 11.Table 11. Port Parameter CommandsCommand Mode Description“B

Seite 1051

CopyrightCopyright © 2014, Allied Telesis, Inc.All rights reserved.This product includes software licensed under the BSD License. As such, the followi

Seite 1052 - RADIUS Server

Contents20PRIVATE-VLAN...

Seite 1053 - Guest VLAN

Chapter 10: Port Parameter Commands200“NO STORM-CONTROL” on page 221Port Interface Removes threshold limits for broadcast, multicast, or unknown unica

Seite 1054 - Guidelines

201“STORM-CONTROL” on page 249 Port Interface Sets a maximum limit of the number of broadcast, multicast, or unknown unicast packets forwarded by a po

Seite 1055

Chapter 10: Port Parameter Commands202BACKPRESSURESyntaxbackpressure on|offParametersonActivates backpressure on the ports.offDeactivates backpressure

Seite 1056

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide203This example configures ports 8 and 21 to 100 Mbps, half-duplex mode, with backpressure disabled:awplus&g

Seite 1057

Chapter 10: Port Parameter Commands204BPLIMITSyntaxbplimit bplimitParametersbplimitSpecifies the number of cells for backpressure. A cell represents 1

Seite 1058 - Operating Modes

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide205CLEAR PORT COUNTERSyntaxclear port counter portParametersportSpecifies the port whose packet counters you

Seite 1059

Chapter 10: Port Parameter Commands206DESCRIPTIONSyntaxdescription descriptionParametersdescriptionSpecifies a description of 1 to 240 alphanumeric ch

Seite 1060 - Configuring Reauthentication

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide207This example removes the current name from port 11 without assigning a new name:awplus> enableawplus#

Seite 1061

Chapter 10: Port Parameter Commands208DUPLEXSyntaxduplex auto|half|fullParametersautoActivates Auto-Negotiation for the duplex mode, so that the duple

Seite 1062 - Configuring Supplicant Ports

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide209ExamplesThis example sets the duplex mode on port 11 half-duplex:awplus> enableawplus# configure termi

Seite 1063

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide21Designating the Authentication Methods ...

Seite 1064 - Supplicant Role

Chapter 10: Port Parameter Commands210EGRESS-RATE-LIMITSyntaxegress-rate-limit valueParametersvalueSpecifies the maximum amount of traffic that can be

Seite 1065

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide211FCTRLLIMITSyntaxfctrllimit fctrllimitParametersfctrllimitSpecifies the number of cells for flow control.

Seite 1066

Chapter 10: Port Parameter Commands212FLOWCONTROLSyntaxflowcontrol send|receive|both on|offParametersendControls whether a port sends pause packets du

Seite 1067

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide213partner. If it is off, a port does not respond to pause packets and continues to transmit packets. At the

Seite 1068

Chapter 10: Port Parameter Commands214This example configures port 1 and 2 to 10 Mbps, full-duplex mode. The send portion of flow control is disabled

Seite 1069 - Control Commands

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide215HOLBPLIMITSyntaxholbplimit holbplimitParameterholbplimitSpecifies the threshold at which a port signals a

Seite 1070

Chapter 10: Port Parameter Commands216Figure 51. Head of Line BlockingThe HOL Limit parameter can help prevent this problem from occurring. It sets a

Seite 1071

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide217NO EGRESS-RATE-LIMITSyntaxno egress-rate-limitParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse this co

Seite 1072

Chapter 10: Port Parameter Commands218NO FLOWCONTROLSyntaxno flowcontrolParameterNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse this command to disable flo

Seite 1073

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide219NO SHUTDOWNSyntaxno shutdownParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse this command to enable po

Seite 1074 - AUTH DYNAMIC-VLAN-CREATION

Contents22Section X: Simple Network Management Protocols ...1119Chapter 71: SN

Seite 1075

Chapter 10: Port Parameter Commands220NO SNMP TRAP LINK-STATUSSyntaxno snmp trap link-statusParameterNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse this co

Seite 1076 - AUTH GUEST-VLAN

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide221NO STORM-CONTROLSyntaxno storm-control broadcast|multicast|dlfParametersbroadcastSpecifies broadcast pack

Seite 1077 - AUTH HOST-MODE

Chapter 10: Port Parameter Commands222POLARITYSyntaxpolarity auto|mdi|mdixParametersautoActivates auto-MDI/MDIX.mdiSets a port’s wiring configuration

Seite 1078

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide223This example sets ports 4 and 18 to the MDI-X wiring configuration:awplus> enableawplus# configure ter

Seite 1079 - AUTH REAUTHENTICATION

Chapter 10: Port Parameter Commands224PURGESyntaxpurgeParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse this command to restore the default settings

Seite 1080 - AUTH TIMEOUT QUIET-PERIOD

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide225RENEGOTIATESyntaxrenegotiateParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse this command to prompt a

Seite 1081 - AUTH TIMEOUT REAUTH-PERIOD

Chapter 10: Port Parameter Commands226RESETSyntaxresetParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse this command to perform a hardware reset on

Seite 1082 - AUTH TIMEOUT SERVER-TIMEOUT

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide227SHOW FLOWCONTROL INTERFACESyntaxshow flowcontrol interface portParameterportSpecifies the port whose flow

Seite 1083 - AUTH TIMEOUT SUPP-TIMEOUT

Chapter 10: Port Parameter Commands228ExampleThis command displays the flow control settings for port 2:awplus# show flowcontrol interface port1.0.2Rx

Seite 1084 - AUTH-MAC ENABLE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide229SHOW INTERFACESyntaxshow interface [port]ParameterportSpecifies the port whose current status you want to

Seite 1085 - AUTH-MAC REAUTH-RELEARNING

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide23Packet Counters ...

Seite 1086 - DOT1X CONTROL-DIRECTION

Chapter 10: Port Parameter Commands230Figure 53. SHOW INTERFACE CommandThe fields are described in Table 13.Interface port1.0.1Link is UP, administrat

Seite 1087

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide231Link is The status of the link on the port. This field is UP when the port has a link with a network devi

Seite 1088 - DOT1X EAP

Chapter 10: Port Parameter Commands232ExamplesThis command displays the current operational state of all the ports:awplus# show interfaceThis command

Seite 1089

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide233SHOW INTERFACE BRIEFSyntaxshow interface briefParameterNoneModesPrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this c

Seite 1090 - DOT1X INITIALIZE INTERFACE

Chapter 10: Port Parameter Commands234ExampleThe following example displays the administrative and link statuses of all of the ports on the switch:awp

Seite 1091 - DOT1X MAX-REAUTH-REQ

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide235SHOW INTERFACE STATUSSyntaxshow interface [port] statusParameterportSpecifies the port whose parameter se

Seite 1092 - DOT1X PORT-CONTROL AUTO

Chapter 10: Port Parameter Commands236ExamplesThis command displays the settings of all the ports:awplus# show interface statusThis command displays t

Seite 1093

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide237SHOW PLATFORM TABLE PORT COUNTERSSyntaxshow platform table port [port] countersParameterportSpecifies the

Seite 1094

Chapter 10: Port Parameter Commands238MulticastPkts Number of received and transmitted multicast packets.BroadcastPkts Number of received and transmit

Seite 1095 - DOT1X PORT-CONTROL SUPPLICANT

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide239ExamplesThis command displays the statistics for ports 21 and 23:awplus# show platform table port port1.0

Seite 1096

Contents24LLDP TIMER ...

Seite 1097

Chapter 10: Port Parameter Commands240SHOW RUNNING-CONFIG INTERFACESyntaxshow running-config interface portParametersportSpecifies a port, multiple po

Seite 1098

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide241SHOW STORM-CONTROLSyntaxshow storm-control [port]ParametersportSpecifies the port whose storm-control, th

Seite 1099

Chapter 10: Port Parameter Commands242ExamplesThis command displays the settings of all the ports:awplus# show storm-controlThis command displays the

Seite 1100

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide243SHOW SYSTEM PLUGGABLESyntaxshow system pluggableParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this

Seite 1101 - DOT1X TIMEOUT TX-PERIOD

Chapter 10: Port Parameter Commands244SHOW SYSTEM PLUGGABLE DETAILSyntaxshow system pluggable detailParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionU

Seite 1102

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide245SHUTDOWNSyntaxshutdownParameterNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse this command to disable ports. P

Seite 1103 - NO AUTH DYNAMIC-VLAN-CREATION

Chapter 10: Port Parameter Commands246SNMP TRAP LINK-STATUSSyntaxsnmp trap link-statusParameterNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse this command

Seite 1104 - NO AUTH GUEST-VLAN

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide247SPEEDSyntaxspeed auto|10|100|1000ParametersautoActivates Auto-Negotiation so that the speed is configured

Seite 1105 - NO AUTH REAUTHENTICATION

Chapter 10: Port Parameter Commands248This example activates Auto-Negotiation on port 15:awplus> enableawplus# configure terminalawplus(config)# in

Seite 1106 - NO AUTH-MAC ENABLE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide249STORM-CONTROLSyntaxstorm-control broadcast|multicast|dlf level valueParametersbroadcastSpecifies broadcas

Seite 1107 - NO DOT1X PORT-CONTROL

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide25Chapter 81: RMON Commands ...

Seite 1108

Chapter 10: Port Parameter Commands250ExamplesThis example sets the maximum threshold level of 5,000 packets per second for ingress broadcast packets

Seite 1109 - SHOW AUTH-MAC INTERFACE

251Chapter 11Power Over Ethernet “Overview” on page 252 “Enabling and Disabling PoE” on page 254  “Adding PD Descriptions to Ports” on page 256  “

Seite 1110

Chapter 11: Power Over Ethernet252OverviewThe AT-FS970M/8PS, AT-FS970M/8PS-E, AT-FS970M/24PS, and AT-FS970M/48PS switches feature Power over Ethernet

Seite 1111

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide253power supplies and can be operated using either one power supply or both power supplies. One power supply

Seite 1112

Chapter 11: Power Over Ethernet254Enabling and Disabling PoEEnabling PoE on ports allows the switch to supply power to PDs connected to the ports. In

Seite 1113 - SHOW DOT1X

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide255This example disables PoE individually on port 5 to port 8:awplus> enableawplus# configure terminalawp

Seite 1114 - SHOW DOT1X INTERFACE

Chapter 11: Power Over Ethernet256Adding PD Descriptions to PortsPDs connected to the ports are easier to identify if you give them descriptions. To a

Seite 1115

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide257Prioritizing PortsWhen the total power requirements of the PDs exceed the total available power of the sw

Seite 1116

Chapter 11: Power Over Ethernet258Managing the Maximum Power Limit on PortsTo manage the switch’s power and optimize its power distribution, the switc

Seite 1117

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide259Managing Legacy PDsThe PoE switch automatically detects whether or not a device plugged into the PoE-enab

Seite 1118

Contents26TELNET IPV6 ...

Seite 1119 - Section X

Chapter 11: Power Over Ethernet260Monitoring Power ConsumptionYou can monitor the power consumption of the switch and PDs by configuring the unit to t

Seite 1120

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide261Displaying PoE InformationThe switch allows you to display PoE information using three commands. Each com

Seite 1121 - SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c

Chapter 11: Power Over Ethernet262This example displays the PoE information of port 1 through port 4:awplus# show power inline interface port1.0.1-por

Seite 1122

263Chapter 12Power Over Ethernet CommandsThe Power over Ethernet (PoE) commands are summarized in Table 23. These commands are only supported on the P

Seite 1123

Chapter 12: Power Over Ethernet Commands264“POWER-INLINE PRIORITY” on page 278Port Interface Assigns a PoE priority level to a port.“POWER-INLINE USAG

Seite 1124 - Enabling SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide265CLEAR POWER-INLINE COUNTERS INTERFACESyntaxclear power-inline counters interface [port]ParameterportSpeci

Seite 1125 - Creating Community Strings

Chapter 12: Power Over Ethernet Commands266NO POWER-INLINE ALLOW-LEGACYSyntaxno power-inline allow-legacyParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescript

Seite 1126

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide267NO POWER-INLINE DESCRIPTIONSyntaxno power-inline descriptionParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescript

Seite 1127

Chapter 12: Power Over Ethernet Commands268NO POWER-INLINE ENABLESyntaxno power-inline enableParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse this

Seite 1128 - Deleting Community Strings

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide269NO POWER-INLINE MAXSyntaxno power-inline maxParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse this comm

Seite 1129 - Disabling SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide27Chapter 94: RADIUS and TACACS+ Clients ...

Seite 1130 - Displaying SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c

Chapter 12: Power Over Ethernet Commands270NO POWER-INLINE PRIORITYSyntaxno power-inline priorityParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse t

Seite 1131 - Exec mode:

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide271NO POWER-INLINE USAGE-THRESHOLDSyntaxno power-inline usage-thresholdParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuratio

Seite 1132

Chapter 12: Power Over Ethernet Commands272NO SERVICE POWER-INLINESyntaxno service power-inlineParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionU

Seite 1133 - SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c Commands

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide273NO SNMP-SERVER ENABLE TRAP POWER-INLINESyntaxno snmp-server enable trap power-inlineParametersNoneModeGlo

Seite 1134

Chapter 12: Power Over Ethernet Commands274POWER-INLINE ALLOW-LEGACYSyntaxpower-inline allow-legacyParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse

Seite 1135 - NO SNMP-SERVER

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide275POWER-INLINE DESCRIPTIONSyntaxpower-inline description descriptionParametersdescriptionSpecifies a PD des

Seite 1136 - NO SNMP-SERVER COMMUNITY

Chapter 12: Power Over Ethernet Commands276POWER-INLINE ENABLESyntaxpower-inline enableParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse this comman

Seite 1137 - NO SNMP-SERVER ENABLE TRAP

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide277POWER-INLINE MAXSyntaxpower-inline max max_powerParametersmax_powerSpecifies the maximum power limit of t

Seite 1138 - Global Configuration mode

Chapter 12: Power Over Ethernet Commands278POWER-INLINE PRIORITYSyntaxpower-inline priority critical|high|lowParameterscriticalSets ports to the Criti

Seite 1139 - NO SNMP-SERVER HOST

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide279ExampleThis example assigns the Critical priority level to port 5:awplus> enableawplus# configure term

Seite 1140

Contents28Assigning Named IPv4 ACLs ...1525Ass

Seite 1141 - NO SNMP-SERVER VIEW

Chapter 12: Power Over Ethernet Commands280POWER-INLINE USAGE-THRESHOLDSyntaxpower-inline usage-threshold thresholdParametersthresholdSpecifies the po

Seite 1142 - NO SNMP TRAP LINK-STATUS

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide281SERVICE POWER-INLINESyntaxservice power-inlineParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse t

Seite 1143 - SHOW RUNNING-CONFIG SNMP

Chapter 12: Power Over Ethernet Commands282SHOW POWER-INLINESyntaxshow power-inlineParameterNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to

Seite 1144 - SHOW SNMP-SERVER

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide283Table 24. SHOW POWER-INLINE CommandField DescriptionNominal Power The switch’s total available power in w

Seite 1145 - SHOW SNMP-SERVER COMMUNITY

Chapter 12: Power Over Ethernet Commands284ExampleThis example displays PoE information about the switch and ports:awplus# show power-inlineOper The P

Seite 1146

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide285SHOW POWER-INLINE COUNTERS INTERFACESyntaxshow power-inline counters interface portParameterportSpecifies

Seite 1147 - SHOW SNMP-SERVER VIEW

Chapter 12: Power Over Ethernet Commands286ExampleThis command displays the PoE event counters for ports 4 to 6:awplus# show power-inline counters int

Seite 1148 - SNMP-SERVER

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide287SHOW POWER-INLINE INTERFACESyntaxshow power-inline interface portParameterportSpecifies a port. You can d

Seite 1149 - SNMP-SERVER COMMUNITY

Chapter 12: Power Over Ethernet Commands288SHOW POWER-INLINE INTERFACE DETAILSyntaxshow power-inline interface port detailParameterportSpecifies a por

Seite 1150 - SNMP-SERVER ENABLE TRAP

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide289PoE admin The status of PoE on the port. The status can be one of the following: Enabled: PoE is enabled

Seite 1151 - SNMP-SERVER ENABLE TRAP AUTH

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide29Single-rate and Twin-rate Policer ...

Seite 1152 - SNMP-SERVER HOST

Chapter 12: Power Over Ethernet Commands290ExamplesThis example displays PoE information for port 1:awplus# show power-inline interface port1.0.1 deta

Seite 1153

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide291SNMP-SERVER ENABLE TRAP POWER-INLINESyntaxsnmp-server enable trap power-inlineParametersNoneModeGlobal Co

Seite 1154 - SNMP-SERVER VIEW

Chapter 12: Power Over Ethernet Commands292

Seite 1155

293Chapter 13IPv4 and IPv6 Management AddressesThis chapter contains the following information: “Overview” on page 294 “Assigning an IPv4 Management

Seite 1156 - SNMP TRAP LINK-STATUS

Chapter 13: IPv4 and IPv6 Management Addresses294OverviewThis chapter explains how to assign the switch an IP address. The switch must have an IP addr

Seite 1157 - SNMPv3 Commands

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide295RMON Used with the RMON portion of the MIB tree on an SNMP workstation to remotely monitor the switch.yes

Seite 1158 - Chapter 73: SNMPv3 Commands

Chapter 13: IPv4 and IPv6 Management Addresses296Here are the guidelines to assigning the switch management IPv4 and IPv6 addresses: You may assign t

Seite 1159

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide297Assigning an IPv4 Management Address and Default GatewayThis section covers the following topics: “Addin

Seite 1160 - NO SNMP-SERVER ENGINEID LOCAL

Chapter 13: IPv4 and IPv6 Management Addresses298Here are several examples of the command. The first example assigns the switch the management IPv4 ad

Seite 1161 - NO SNMP-SERVER GROUP

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide299The next series of commands assigns the management address 143.24.55.67 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0 to

Seite 1162

Allied Telesis is committed to meeting the requirements of the open source licenses including the GNU General Public License (GPL) and will make all r

Seite 1163

Contents30NO MATCH PROTOCOL ...172

Seite 1164 - NO SNMP-SERVER USER

Chapter 13: IPv4 and IPv6 Management Addresses300NoteIf an IPv4 default gateway is already assigned to the switch, you must delete it prior to enterin

Seite 1165

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide301awplus> enableawplus# configure terminalawplus(config)# no ip route 0.0.0.0/0 149.121.43.23Displaying

Seite 1166

Chapter 13: IPv4 and IPv6 Management Addresses302Assigning an IPv6 Management Address and Default GatewayThis section covers the following topics: “A

Seite 1167 - SHOW SNMP-SERVER GROUP

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide303NoteIf there is a management IPv6 address already assigned to the switch, you must delete it prior to ent

Seite 1168 - SHOW SNMP-SERVER HOST

Chapter 13: IPv4 and IPv6 Management Addresses304The IPADDDRESS parameter is the default gateway to be assigned the switch. The address must be an IPv

Seite 1169 - SHOW SNMP-SERVER USER

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide305Displaying anIPv6ManagementAddress andDefault GatewayThere are two commands for displaying a management I

Seite 1170

Chapter 13: IPv4 and IPv6 Management Addresses306

Seite 1171

307Chapter 14IPv4 and IPv6 Management Address CommandsThe IPv4 and IPv6 management address commands are summarized in Table 28.Table 28. Management IP

Seite 1172 - SNMP-SERVER ENGINEID LOCAL

Chapter 14: IPv4 and IPv6 Management Address Commands308“SHOW IPV6 INTERFACE” on page 329Privileged Exec Displays the IPv4 management address.“SHOW IP

Seite 1173 - SNMP-SERVER GROUP

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide309CLEAR IPV6 NEIGHBORSSyntaxclear ipv6 neighborsParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this c

Seite 1174

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide31Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) ...

Seite 1175

Chapter 14: IPv4 and IPv6 Management Address Commands310IP ADDRESSSyntaxip address ipaddress/maskParametersipaddressSpecifies a management IPv4 addres

Seite 1176

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide311ExamplesThis example assigns the switch the IPv4 management address 142.35.78.21 and subnet mask 255.255.

Seite 1177 - SNMP-SERVER USER

Chapter 14: IPv4 and IPv6 Management Address Commands312IP ADDRESS DHCPSyntaxip address dhcpParametersNoneModeVLAN Interface modeDescriptionUse this c

Seite 1178

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide313ExampleThis example activates the DHCP client so that the switch obtains its IPv4 management address from

Seite 1179

Chapter 14: IPv4 and IPv6 Management Address Commands314IP ROUTESyntaxip route 0.0.0.0/0 ipaddressParametersipaddressSpecifies an IPv4 default gateway

Seite 1180

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide315ExampleThis example assigns the switch the IPv4 default gateway address 143.87.132.45:awplus> enableaw

Seite 1181 - Network Management

Chapter 14: IPv4 and IPv6 Management Address Commands316IPV6 ADDRESSSyntaxipv6 address ipaddress/maskParametersipaddressSpecifies an IPv6 management a

Seite 1182

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide317and syslog servers). The VLAN must already exist on the switch before you use this command.Confirmation C

Seite 1183 - Chapter 74

Chapter 14: IPv4 and IPv6 Management Address Commands318IPV6 ROUTESyntaxipv6 route ::/0 ipaddressParametersipaddressSpecifies an IPv6 address of a def

Seite 1184

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide319ExampleThis example assigns the switch the IPv6 default gateway address 45ab:672:934c::78:17cb:awplus>

Seite 1185

Contents32ROUTER RIP ...

Seite 1186 - Configuring the sFlow Agent

Chapter 14: IPv4 and IPv6 Management Address Commands320NO IP ADDRESSSyntaxno ip addressParametersNoneModeVLAN Interface modeDescriptionUse this comma

Seite 1187 - Configuring the Ports

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide321NO IP ADDRESS DHCPSyntaxno ip address dhcpParametersNoneModeVLAN Interface modeDescriptionUse this comman

Seite 1188 - Polling Interval

Chapter 14: IPv4 and IPv6 Management Address Commands322NO IP ROUTESyntaxno ip route 0.0.0.0/0 ipaddressParametersipaddressSpecifies the current defau

Seite 1189 - Enabling the sFlow Agent

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide323NO IPV6 ADDRESSSyntaxno ipv6 addressParametersNoneModeVLAN Interface modeDescriptionUse this command to d

Seite 1190 - Disabling the sFlow Agent

Chapter 14: IPv4 and IPv6 Management Address Commands324NO IPV6 ROUTESyntaxno ipv6 route ::/0 ipaddressParametersipaddressSpecifies the current IPv6 d

Seite 1191 - Displaying the sFlow Agent

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide325SHOW IP INTERFACESyntaxshow ip interfaceParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command

Seite 1192 - Configuration Example

Chapter 14: IPv4 and IPv6 Management Address Commands326SHOW IP ROUTESyntaxshow ip routeParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this comm

Seite 1193

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide327The field “Gateway of last resort is” states the default gateway, which, if defined on the switch, is als

Seite 1194 - Chapter 74: sFlow Agent

Chapter 14: IPv4 and IPv6 Management Address Commands328ExampleThe following example displays the routes on the switch:awplus# show ip route

Seite 1195 - Chapter 75

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide329SHOW IPV6 INTERFACESyntaxshow ipv6 interfaceParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this com

Seite 1196 - NO SFLOW COLLECTOR IP

33FiguresFigure 1. Command Modes ...

Seite 1197 - NO SFLOW ENABLE

Chapter 14: IPv4 and IPv6 Management Address Commands330SHOW IPV6 ROUTESyntaxshow ipv6 routeParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this

Seite 1198 - SFLOW COLLECTOR IP

331Chapter 15Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) ClientThis chapter contains the following information: “Overview” on page 332 “Activating the SNTP

Seite 1199 - SFLOW ENABLE

Chapter 15: Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Client332OverviewThe switch has a Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) client for setting its date and

Seite 1200 - SFLOW POLLING-INTERVAL

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide333Activating the SNTP Client and Specifying the IP Address of an NTP or SNTP ServerTo activate the SNTP cli

Seite 1201

Chapter 15: Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Client334Configuring Daylight Savings Time and UTC OffsetIf the time that the NTP or SNTP server provi

Seite 1202 - SFLOW SAMPLING-RATE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide335In this example, the client is configured for ST and a UTC offset of +2 hours and 45 minutes:awplus> e

Seite 1203

Chapter 15: Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Client336Disabling the SNTP ClientTo disable the SNTP client so that the switch does not obtain its da

Seite 1204 - SHOW SFLOW

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide337Displaying the SNTP ClientTo display the settings of the SNTP client on the switch, use the SHOW NTP ASSO

Seite 1205

Chapter 15: Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Client338Displaying the Date and TimeTo display the date and time, use the SHOW CLOCK command in the U

Seite 1206

339Chapter 16SNTP Client CommandsThe SNTP commands are summarized in Table 33.Table 33. Simple Network Time Protocol CommandsCommand Mode Description“

Seite 1207 - LLDP and LLDP-MED

Figures34Figure 51. Head of Line Blocking...

Seite 1208

Chapter 16: SNTP Client Commands340CLOCK SUMMER-TIMESyntaxclock summer-timeParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command to e

Seite 1209 - Optional LLDP

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide341CLOCK TIMEZONESyntaxclock timezone +hh:mm|-hh:mmParametershh:mmSpecifies the number of hours and minutes

Seite 1210

Chapter 16: SNTP Client Commands342NO CLOCK SUMMER-TIMESyntaxno clock summer-timeParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this comman

Seite 1211 - MED TLVs

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide343NO NTP PEERSyntaxno ntp serverParameterNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command to de

Seite 1212

Chapter 16: SNTP Client Commands344NTP PEERSyntaxntp peer ipaddressParameteripaddressSpecifies an IP address of an SNTP or NTP server.ModeGlobal Confi

Seite 1213

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide345PURGE NTPSyntaxpurge ntpParameterNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command to disable

Seite 1214 - Chapter 76: LLDP and LLDP-MED

Chapter 16: SNTP Client Commands346SHOW CLOCKSyntaxshow clockParametersNoneModesUser Exec mode and Privileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to

Seite 1215

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide347SHOW NTP ASSOCIATIONSSyntaxshow ntp associationsParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this

Seite 1216 -  mac-phy-config

Chapter 16: SNTP Client Commands348ExampleThe following example displays the settings of the SNTP client:awplus# show ntp associationsUTC Offset The t

Seite 1217

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide349SHOW NTP STATUSSyntaxshow ntp statusParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to

Seite 1218 -  Network-policy

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide35Figure 111. SHOW FILE SYSTEMS Command...

Seite 1219 - INTERFACE command to confirm

Chapter 16: SNTP Client Commands350

Seite 1220

351Chapter 17Domain Name System (DNS) “Overview” on page 352 “Adding a DNS Server to the Switch” on page 354 “Enabling or Disabling the DNS Client”

Seite 1221

Chapter 17: Domain Name System (DNS)352OverviewThe Domain Name System (DNS) is a naming system that allows you to access remote systems using host nam

Seite 1222

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide353DNS Sever List The DNS server list is a set of DNS servers that a DNS client on the switch sends a reques

Seite 1223

Chapter 17: Domain Name System (DNS)354Adding a DNS Server to the SwitchThe switch has a DNS client. When you add a DNS server to the switch, the DNS

Seite 1224

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide355Enabling or Disabling the DNS ClientThe DNS client on the switch allows you to use domain names instead o

Seite 1225

Chapter 17: Domain Name System (DNS)356Adding a Domain to the DNS ListThe switch allows you to create a list of domains to save typing the portion of

Seite 1226

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide357Setting a Default Domain Name for the DNSThe switch allows you to save typing of the portion of a domain

Seite 1227

Chapter 17: Domain Name System (DNS)358

Seite 1228

359Chapter 18Domain Name System (DNS) CommandsThe DNS commands are summarized in Table 35.Table 35. DNS CommandsCommand Mode Description“IP NAME-SERVE

Seite 1229 - Removing LLDP TLVs from Ports

Figures36Figure 171. SHOW VLAN Command...

Seite 1230

Chapter 18: Domain Name System (DNS) Commands360IP NAME-SERVERSyntaxip name-server <ip-address>Parametersip-addressSpecifies the IP address of a

Seite 1231

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide361To delete a DNS server with an IP address of 10.10.10.5 from the DNS server list, use the command:awplus&

Seite 1232

Chapter 18: Domain Name System (DNS) Commands362IP DOMAIN-NAMESyntaxip domain-name <domain-name>Parametersdomain-nameSpecifies a domain string,

Seite 1233

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide363IP DOMAIN-LISTSyntaxip domain-list <domain-name>Parametersdomain-nameSpecifies a domain string, for

Seite 1234

Chapter 18: Domain Name System (DNS) Commands364ExamplesTo add the domains “com” and “net” to the DNS list, use the following commands:awplus> enab

Seite 1235

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide365IP DOMAIN-LOOKUPSyntaxip domain-lookupParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this comm

Seite 1236

Chapter 18: Domain Name System (DNS) Commands366SHOW IP NAME-SERVERSyntaxshow ip name-serverParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this

Seite 1237 - Displaying Port TLVs

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide367SHOW IP DOMAIN-NAMESyntaxshow ip domain-nameParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this com

Seite 1238

Chapter 18: Domain Name System (DNS) Commands368SHOW HOSTSSyntaxshow hostsParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to display

Seite 1239 - LLDP and LLDP-MED Commands

369Chapter 19MAC Address TableThis chapter discusses the following topics: “Overview” on page 370 “Adding Static MAC Addresses” on page 372 “Deleti

Seite 1240

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide37Figure 231. Displaying the Local Manager Accounts in the Running Configuration...

Seite 1241

Chapter 19: MAC Address Table370OverviewThe MAC address table stores the MAC addresses of all the network devices that are connected to the switch’s p

Seite 1242 - CLEAR LLDP STATISTICS

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide371The period of time the switch waits before purging inactive dynamic MAC addresses is called the aging tim

Seite 1243 - CLEAR LLDP TABLE

Chapter 19: MAC Address Table372Adding Static MAC AddressesThe command for adding static unicast MAC addresses to the switch is MAC ADDRESS-TABLE STAT

Seite 1244 - LLDP HOLDTIME-MULTIPLIER

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide373awplus> enableawplus# configure terminalawplus(config)# mac address-table static 00:a0:d2:18:1a:11 dis

Seite 1245 - LLDP LOCATION

Chapter 19: MAC Address Table374Deleting MAC AddressesTo delete MAC addresses from the switch, use the CLEAR MAC ADDRESS-TABLE command in the Privileg

Seite 1246

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide375This example deletes all of the dynamic addresses learned on port 20: awplus> enableawplus# clear mac

Seite 1247 - LLDP MANAGEMENT-ADDRESS

Chapter 19: MAC Address Table376Setting the Aging TimerThe aging timer defines the length of time that inactive dynamic MAC addresses remain in the ta

Seite 1248

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide377Displaying the MAC Address TableTo view the aging time or the MAC address table, use the SHOW MAC ADDRESS

Seite 1249 - LLDP MED-NOTIFICATIONS

Chapter 19: MAC Address Table378This example displays the addresses learned on the ports in a VLAN with the VID 8:awplus# show mac address-table vlan

Seite 1250 - LLDP MED-TLV-SELECT

379Chapter 20MAC Address Table CommandsThe MAC address table commands are summarized in Table 36.Table 36. MAC Address Table CommandsCommand Mode Desc

Seite 1251

Figures38

Seite 1252

Chapter 20: MAC Address Table Commands380CLEAR MAC ADDRESS-TABLESyntaxclear mac address-table dynamic|static [address macaddress]|[interface port]|[vl

Seite 1253 - LLDP NOTIFICATIONS

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide381ExamplesThis example deletes all of the dynamic addresses from the table:awplus> enableawplus# clear m

Seite 1254 - LLDP NOTIFICATION-INTERVAL

Chapter 20: MAC Address Table Commands382MAC ADDRESS-TABLE AGEING-TIMESyntaxmac address-table ageing-time value|noneParameterageing-timeSpecifies the

Seite 1255 - LLDP REINIT

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide383This example disables the aging timer so that the switch does not delete inactive dynamic MAC addresses f

Seite 1256 - LLDP RUN

Chapter 20: MAC Address Table Commands384MAC ADDRESS-TABLE STATICSyntaxmac address-table static macaddress forward|discard interface port [vlan vlan-n

Seite 1257 - LLDP TIMER

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide385Confirmation Command“SHOW MAC ADDRESS-TABLE” on page 388ExamplesThis example adds the static MAC address

Seite 1258 - LLDP TLV-SELECT

Chapter 20: MAC Address Table Commands386NO MAC ADDRESS-TABLE STATICSyntaxno mac address-table static macaddress forward|discard interface port [vlan

Seite 1259

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide387Confirmation Command“SHOW MAC ADDRESS-TABLE” on page 388ExamplesThis example deletes the MAC address 00:A

Seite 1260

Chapter 20: MAC Address Table Commands388SHOW MAC ADDRESS-TABLESyntaxshow mac address-table begin|exclude|include [interface port]|[vlan vid]Parameter

Seite 1261 - LLDP TRANSMIT RECEIVE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide389An example of the table is shown in Figure 90.Figure 90. SHOW MAC ADDRESS-TABLE CommandThe Aging Interval

Seite 1262 - LLDP TX-DELAY

39Table 1. Remote Software Tool Settings ...

Seite 1263 - LOCATION CIVIC-LOCATION

Chapter 20: MAC Address Table Commands390The Multicast Switch Forwarding Database contains the multicast addresses. The columns are defined in this ta

Seite 1264

391Chapter 21Enhanced StackingThis chapter discusses the following topics: “Overview” on page 392 “Configuring the Command Switch” on page 395 “Con

Seite 1265

Chapter 21: Enhanced Stacking392OverviewEnhanced stacking is a management tool that allows you to manage different AT-FS970M Switches from one managem

Seite 1266 - LOCATION COORD-LOCATION

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide393 A member switch can be any distance from the command switch, so long as the distance adheres to Etherne

Seite 1267

Chapter 21: Enhanced Stacking3942. On the switch chosen to be the command switch, activate enhanced stacking and change its stacking status to command

Seite 1268

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide395Configuring the Command SwitchHere is an example on how to configure the switch as the command switch of

Seite 1269 - LOCATION ELIN-LOCATION

Chapter 21: Enhanced Stacking3962. After creating the common VLAN on the switch, assign it the management IP address and default gateway:3. Use the ES

Seite 1270 - NO LLDP MED-NOTIFICATIONS

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide397awplus# writeSave the configuration.

Seite 1271 - NO LLDP MED-TLV-SELECT

Chapter 21: Enhanced Stacking398Configuring a Member SwitchThis example shows you how to configure the switch as a member switch of an enhanced stack.

Seite 1272

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide3993. To save the configuration, enter the WRITE command in the Privileged Executive mode.4. Connect the swi

Seite 1274 - NO LLDP RUN

Tables40Table 50. Group Link Control Commands ...

Seite 1275 - NO LLDP TLV-SELECT

Chapter 21: Enhanced Stacking400Managing the Member Switches of an Enhanced StackHere are the steps on how to manage the member switches of an enhance

Seite 1276 - NO LLDP TRANSMIT RECEIVE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide4016. When you are finished managing the member switch, enter the EXIT command from the User Exec mode or Pr

Seite 1277 - NO LOCATION

Chapter 21: Enhanced Stacking402Changing the Enhanced Stacking ModeIf you want to change the enhanced stacking mode of a switch from command to member

Seite 1278

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide4032. On the member switch, change its mode from member to command with the ESTACK COMMAND-SWITCH command.3.

Seite 1279 - SHOW LLDP

Chapter 21: Enhanced Stacking404Uploading Boot Configuration Files from the Command Switch to Member SwitchesYou may use the enhanced stacking feature

Seite 1280

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide405The second prompt is shown here:Enter the list of switches ->At the prompt, enter the enhanced stack n

Seite 1281 - SHOW LLDP INTERFACE

Chapter 21: Enhanced Stacking406Here are the steps to perform on the command switch to upload the configuration file from its file system to the membe

Seite 1282

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide407Here is another example of the feature. This example uploads a configuration file to a new switch in an e

Seite 1283

Chapter 21: Enhanced Stacking4083. Use the ESTACK RUN command in the Global Configuration mode to activate enhanced stacking on the switch. It is not

Seite 1284

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide4093. If the new member switch is to use BOOT.CFG as the name of its active boot configuration file, you com

Seite 1285 - SHOW LLDP NEIGHBORS DETAIL

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide41Table 110. Reauthentication Commands ...

Seite 1286

Chapter 21: Enhanced Stacking410awplus# show estack remotelistReconfirm the enhanced stacking ID number of the replacement member switch.awplus# confi

Seite 1287

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide411Uploading the Management Software from the Command Switch to Member SwitchesYou may use enhanced stacking

Seite 1288 -  Voice VLAN ID

Chapter 21: Enhanced Stacking412CautionA member switch stops forwarding network traffic after it receives the management software from the command swi

Seite 1289

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide413Disabling Enhanced StackingThe command that disables enhanced stacking on a switch is the NO ESTACK RUN c

Seite 1290 - SHOW LLDP NEIGHBORS INTERFACE

Chapter 21: Enhanced Stacking414

Seite 1291

415Chapter 22Enhanced Stacking CommandsThe enhanced stacking commands are summarized in Table 39.Table 39. Enhanced Stacking CommandsCommand Mode Desc

Seite 1292 - SHOW LLDP STATISTICS

Chapter 22: Enhanced Stacking Commands416“UPLOAD IMAGE REMOTELIST” on page 430Global ConfigurationUploads the management software on the command switc

Seite 1293

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide417ESTACK COMMAND-SWITCHSyntaxestack command-switchParameterNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescription Us

Seite 1294

Chapter 22: Enhanced Stacking Commands418ESTACK RUNSyntaxestack runParameterNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command to activate e

Seite 1295

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide419NO ESTACK COMMAND-SWITCHSyntaxno estack command-switchParameterNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescripti

Seite 1296 - SHOW LOCATION

Tables42Table 170. Named IPv4 ACL TCP Deny Example ...

Seite 1297

Chapter 22: Enhanced Stacking Commands420NO ESTACK RUNSyntaxno estack runParameterNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command to disa

Seite 1298

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide421RCOMMANDSyntaxrcommand switch_idParametersswitch_idSpecifies the ID number of a member switch you want to

Seite 1299 - Chapter 78

Chapter 22: Enhanced Stacking Commands422REBOOT ESTACK MEMBERSyntaxreboot estack member id_number | allParametersid_numberSpecifies the enhanced stack

Seite 1300

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide423ExamplesThis example reboots a member switch that has the ID number 3:awplus> enableawplus# configure

Seite 1301 - Adding Static ARP Entries

Chapter 22: Enhanced Stacking Commands424SHOW ESTACKSyntaxshow estackParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to display whet

Seite 1302

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide425ExampleThe following example displays whether enhanced stacking is enabled or disabled on the switch and

Seite 1303 - Displaying the ARP Table

Chapter 22: Enhanced Stacking Commands426SHOW ESTACK COMMAND-SWITCHSyntaxshow estack command-switchParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUs

Seite 1304

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide427SHOW ESTACK REMOTELISTSyntaxshow estack remotelist [name] [series]ParametersnameSorts the list of switche

Seite 1305

Chapter 22: Enhanced Stacking Commands428This example sorts the switches by host name:awplus> enableawplus# configure terminalawplus(config)# show

Seite 1306

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide429UPLOAD CONFIG REMOTELISTSyntaxupload config remotelistParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescript

Seite 1307

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide43Table 230. QoS Display Commands ...

Seite 1308 - CLEAR ARP-CACHE

Chapter 22: Enhanced Stacking Commands430UPLOAD IMAGE REMOTELISTSyntaxupload image remotelistParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse

Seite 1309 - NO ARP (IP ADDRESS)

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide431CautionThe member switches stop forwarding network traffic after they receive the management software fro

Seite 1310 - SHOW ARP

Chapter 22: Enhanced Stacking Commands432

Seite 1311

433Chapter 23Link-flap ProtectionThis chapter explains link-flap protection. The sections in this chapter include: “Overview” on page 434 “Guideline

Seite 1312

Chapter 23: Link-flap Protection434OverviewA port that is unable to maintain a reliable connection to a network node may experience a condition referr

Seite 1313 - Chapter 80

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide435GuidelinesHere are the guidelines to link-flap protection: You can enable this feature on a per-port bas

Seite 1314

Chapter 23: Link-flap Protection436Configuring the FeatureHere are the commands that are used to configure the link-flap protection feature. They conf

Seite 1315 - RMON Port Statistics

437Chapter 24Link-flap Protection CommandsThe link-flap protection commands are summarized in the following table:Table 41. Link-flap Protection Comma

Seite 1316 - Deleting Statistics

Chapter 24: Link-flap Protection Commands438LINK-FLAP DURATIONSyntaxlink-flap duration <20 - 65535>ParametersdurationIndicates the time period t

Seite 1317 - RMON Histories

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide439LINK-FLAP PROTECTIONSyntaxlink-flap protection portParameterportSpecifies a port for link-flap protection

Seite 1319 - Deleting History

Chapter 24: Link-flap Protection Commands440LINK-FLAP RATESyntaxlink-flap rate <4 - 65535>ParametersrateSpecifies the number of link changes tha

Seite 1320 - RMON Alarms

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide441NO LINK-FLAP PROTECTIONSyntaxno link-flap protectionParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse t

Seite 1321 - Statistics Groups

Chapter 24: Link-flap Protection Commands442SHOW LINK-FLAPSyntaxshow link-flapParametersNoneModeUser Exec and Privileged Exec modesDescriptionUse this

Seite 1322

443Chapter 25Port MirrorThis chapter discusses the following topics: “Overview” on page 444 “Creating the Port Mirror or Adding New Source Ports” on

Seite 1323 - Alarm - Example

Chapter 25: Port Mirror444OverviewThe port mirror is a management tool that allows you to monitor the traffic on one or more ports on the switch. It w

Seite 1324 - Enter_log_message

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide445Creating the Port Mirror or Adding New Source PortsThe command to create the port mirror is the MIRROR IN

Seite 1325

Chapter 25: Port Mirror446Removing Source Ports or Deleting the Port MirrorTo remove source ports from the port mirror, enter the Port Interface mode

Seite 1326 - Chapter 80: RMON

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide447Combining the Port Mirror with Access Control ListsYou may combine the port mirror with an access control

Seite 1327 - Phase 4: Creating the Alarm

Chapter 25: Port Mirror448awplus(config)# interface port1.0.14,port1.0.15Enter the Port Interface modes for ports 14 and 15.awplus(config-if)# access-

Seite 1328 - Use the SHOW RMON ALARM

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide449Displaying the Port MirrorTo display the port mirror, go to the Privileged Exec mode and enter the SHOW M

Seite 1329 - RMON Commands

45PrefaceThis is the command line management guide for the AT-FS970M Series of Fast Ethernet Switches. The instructions in this guide explain how to s

Seite 1330 - Chapter 81: RMON Commands

Chapter 25: Port Mirror450

Seite 1331 - NO RMON ALARM

451Chapter 26Port Mirror CommandsThe port mirror commands are summarized in Table 42.Table 42. Port Mirror CommandsCommand Mode Description“MIRROR” on

Seite 1332 - NO RMON COLLECTION HISTORY

Chapter 26: Port Mirror Commands452MIRRORSyntaxmirrorParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse this command to designate the destination por

Seite 1333 - NO RMON COLLECTION STATS

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide453MIRROR INTERFACESyntaxmirror interface source_ports direction receive|transmit|bothParameterssource_ports

Seite 1334 - NO RMON EVENT

Chapter 26: Port Mirror Commands454ExampleThis example configures the port mirror to copy the ingress traffic on ports 3 and 4, the source ports, to p

Seite 1335 - RMON ALARM

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide455NO MIRROR INTERFACESyntaxno mirror interface source_portsParameterssource_portsSpecifies a source port of

Seite 1336

Chapter 26: Port Mirror Commands456SHOW MIRRORSyntaxshow mirrorParametersNoneModesPrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to display the sourc

Seite 1337

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide457If you are using the port mirror with access control lists to copy subsets of ingress packets on source p

Seite 1338 - RMON COLLECTION HISTORY

Chapter 26: Port Mirror Commands458

Seite 1339

459Chapter 27DHCP Relay Overview “Overview” on page 460 “Configuring the DHCP Relay Agent” on page 464

Seite 1340 - RMON COLLECTION STATS

46Document ConventionsThis document uses the following conventions:NoteNotes provide additional information.CautionCautions inform you that performing

Seite 1341 - RMON EVENT LOG

Chapter 27: DHCP Relay Overview460OverviewThe switch has a DHCP relay agent to relay BOOTP messages between clients and DHCP or BOOTP servers. A clien

Seite 1342 - RMON EVENT LOG TRAP

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide461A routing interface that receives a BOOTP reply from a server inspects the broadcast flag field in the pa

Seite 1343

Chapter 27: DHCP Relay Overview462Client Requestswith Option 82The previous discussion deals with cases where DHCP requests do not already contain opt

Seite 1344 - RMON EVENT TRAP

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide463The possible actions are listed here: Leave the existing option-82 field untouched Append its own optio

Seite 1345

Chapter 27: DHCP Relay Overview464Configuring the DHCP Relay AgentHere are the procedures to configuring the DHCP relay agent: “Adding the IP Address

Seite 1346 - SHOW RMON ALARM

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide465Adding DHCPRelay to theVLANsA VLAN has to have an IP address interface before you can add the DHCP relay

Seite 1347

Chapter 27: DHCP Relay Overview466awplus> enableEnter the Privileged Exec mode from the User Executive mode.awplus# configure terminalEnter the Glo

Seite 1348 - SHOW RMON EVENT

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide467Configuring theDHCP RelayOption 82Table 44 lists the commands that configure DHCP relay option 82. The co

Seite 1349

Chapter 27: DHCP Relay Overview468Set the response of the DHCP relay agent to client packets containing option-82 information.IP DHCP-RELAY INFORMATIO

Seite 1350 - SHOW RMON HISTORY

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide469This example of the commands configures the DHCP agent to append its option 82 information to the BOOTP r

Seite 1351

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide47Where to Find Web-based GuidesThe installation and user guides for all of the Allied Telesis products are

Seite 1352 - SHOW RMON STATISTICS

Chapter 27: DHCP Relay Overview470

Seite 1353 - Management Security

471Chapter 28DHCP Relay CommandsThe DHCP relay commands are summarized in Table 45.Table 45. DHCP Relay CommandsCommand Mode Description“IP DHCP-RELAY

Seite 1354

Chapter 28: DHCP Relay Commands472“NO IP DHCP-RELAY AGENT-OPTION CHECKING” on page 483Global ConfigurationConfigures the DHCP relay agent to forward D

Seite 1355 - Local Manager Accounts

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide473IP DHCP-RELAYSyntaxip dhcp-relayParametersNoneModeVLAN Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command to a

Seite 1356

Chapter 28: DHCP Relay Commands474IP DHCP-RELAY AGENT-OPTIONSyntaxip dhcp-relay agent-optionParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse

Seite 1357 - Encryption

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide475IP DHCP-RELAY AGENT-OPTION CHECKINGSyntaxip dhcp-relay agent-option checkingParametersNoneModeGlobal Conf

Seite 1358

Chapter 28: DHCP Relay Commands476IP DHCP-RELAY INFORMATION POLICYSyntaxip dhcp-relay information policy policy append|drop|keep|replaceParameterspoli

Seite 1359

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide477ExamplesThis example selects the append policy so that the DHCP relay agent adds its option 82 details to

Seite 1360

Chapter 28: DHCP Relay Commands478IP DHCP-RELAY MAX-MESSAGE-LENGTHSyntaxip dhcp-relay max-message-length lengthParameterslengthSpecifies the maximum l

Seite 1361

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide479IP DHCP-RELAY MAXHOPSSyntaxip dhcp-relay maxhops maxhopsParametersmaxhopsSpecifies the maximum hop count

Seite 1362

48Contacting Allied TelesisIf you need assistance with this product, you may contact Allied Telesis technical support by going to the Support & Se

Seite 1363

Chapter 28: DHCP Relay Commands480IP DHCP-RELAY SERVER-ADDRESSSyntaxip dhcp-relay server-address ipaddressParametersipaddressSpecifies the IP address

Seite 1364

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide481NO IP DHCP-RELAYSyntaxno ip dhcp-relayParametersNoneModeVLAN Configuration modeDescriptionUse this comman

Seite 1365 - Configuration

Chapter 28: DHCP Relay Commands482NO IP DHCP-RELAY AGENT-OPTIONSyntaxno ip dhcp-relay agent-optionParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescripti

Seite 1366

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide483NO IP DHCP-RELAY AGENT-OPTION CHECKINGSyntaxno ip dhcp-relay agent-option checkingParametersNoneModeGloba

Seite 1367 - Chapter 83

Chapter 28: DHCP Relay Commands484NO IP DHCP-RELAY SERVER-ADDRESSSyntaxno ip dhcp-relay server-address ipaddressParametersipaddressSpecifies the IP ad

Seite 1368 - ENABLE PASSWORD

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide485NO SERVICE DHCP-RELAYSyntaxno service dhcp-relayParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse

Seite 1369

Chapter 28: DHCP Relay Commands486SERVICE DHCP-RELAYSyntaxservice dhcp-relayParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command to

Seite 1370 - NO ENABLE PASSWORD

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide487SHOW IP DHCP-RELAYSyntaxshow ip dhcp-relay [interface vlanid]ParametersvlanidSpecifies a VLAN ID number,

Seite 1371

Chapter 28: DHCP Relay Commands488The INTERFACE option may be used to determine the status of the agent on the VLANs. The status is either is enabled

Seite 1372 - NO USERNAME

489Chapter 29Group Link ControlThis chapter provides the following sections: “Overview” on page 490 “Guidelines” on page 498 “Configuration Example

Seite 1373 - SERVICE PASSWORD-ENCRYPTION

49Section IGetting StartedThis section contains the following chapters: Chapter 1, “AlliedWare Plus Command Line Interface” on page 51 Chapter 2, “S

Seite 1374 - USERNAME

Chapter 29: Group Link Control490OverviewGroup link control is designed to improve the effectiveness of the redundant systems in a network. It enables

Seite 1375

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide491In the first diagram a server with two teamed network adapter cards is connected to different switches, w

Seite 1376

Chapter 29: Group Link Control492Figure 103. Group Link Control Example 2With group link control you can address this problem by creating on switch 3

Seite 1377 - Telnet Server

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide493Figure 104. Group Link Control Example 3When a link on an upstream port is reestablished, the switch auto

Seite 1378

Chapter 29: Group Link Control494Figure 105. Group Link Control Example 4If connectivity is lost on both ports 17 and 20, the downstream ports 24 and

Seite 1379 - Enabling the Telnet Server

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide495approach is to create groups in which the ports are connected to the same network node. This is useful in

Seite 1380 - Disabling the Telnet Server

Chapter 29: Group Link Control496Only one group has to be true for the switch to shut down the ports of the trunk. If, for instance, port 8 loses conn

Seite 1381 - Displaying the Telnet Server

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide497Table 48. Link Control Groups on Switch 3 in Example 7Link Control GroupUpstream PortsDownstream Ports1 7

Seite 1382 - Chapter 84: Telnet Server

Chapter 29: Group Link Control498GuidelinesHere are the guidelines to group link control: The switch or stack can support up to eight groups. A grou

Seite 1383 - Telnet Server Commands

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide499Configuration ExamplesTable 49 lists the group link control commands.Here are a few examples on how to co

Seite 1386 - SHOW TELNET

Chapter 29: Group Link Control500This example creates the three groups in Table 47 on page 495, for a static or LACP trunk. Each port is an upstream p

Seite 1387 - Telnet Client

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide501awplus# show group-link-controlDisplay the groups to verify their configurations.ID ...

Seite 1388

Chapter 29: Group Link Control502

Seite 1389

503Chapter 30Group Link Control CommandsThe group link control commands are summarized in the following table and described in detail within the chapt

Seite 1390 - Chapter 86: Telnet Client

Chapter 30: Group Link Control Commands504GROUP-LINK-CONTROLSyntaxgroup-link-control group_idParametergroup_idSpecifies the ID number of a new group.

Seite 1391 - Telnet Client Commands

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide505GROUP-LINK-CONTROL DOWNSTREAMSyntaxgroup-link-control downstream group_idParametergroup_idSpecifies a gro

Seite 1392

Chapter 30: Group Link Control Commands506This example adds ports 15 and 16 as downstream ports to group ID 3:awplus> enableawplus# configure termi

Seite 1393 - TELNET IPV6

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide507GROUP-LINK-CONTROL UPSTREAMSyntaxgroup-link-control upstream group_idParametergroup_idSpecifies a group I

Seite 1394

Chapter 30: Group Link Control Commands508NO GROUP-LINK-CONTROLSyntaxno group-link-control group_idParametersgroup_idSpecifies the ID number of the gr

Seite 1395 - Secure Shell (SSH) Server

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide509NO GROUP-LINK-CONTROL DOWNSTREAMSyntaxno group-link-control group downstream group_idParametergroup_idSpe

Seite 1396

51Chapter 1AlliedWare Plus Command Line InterfaceThis chapter has the following sections: “Management Sessions” on page 52 “Management Interfaces” o

Seite 1397 - Support for SSH

Chapter 30: Group Link Control Commands510NO GROUP-LINK-CONTROL UPSTREAMSyntaxno group-link-control upstream group_idParametergroup_idSpecifies a grou

Seite 1398

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide511SHOW GROUP-LINK-CONTROLSyntaxshow group-link-control [group_id]Parametersgroup_idSpecifies a group ID num

Seite 1399 - SSH and Enhanced Stacking

Chapter 30: Group Link Control Commands512ExamplesThis example displays all of the groups on the switch:awplus> enableawplus# show group-link-contr

Seite 1400

513Chapter 31Multicast CommandsThe multicast commands are summarized in Table 52.Table 52. Multicast CommandsCommand Mode Description“NO SWITCHPORT BL

Seite 1401

Chapter 31: Multicast Commands514NO SWITCHPORT BLOCK EGRESS-MULTICASTSyntaxno switchport block egress-multicastParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDe

Seite 1402 - Enabling the SSH Server

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide515NO SWITCHPORT BLOCK INGRESS-MULTICASTSyntaxno switchport block ingress-multicastParametersNoneModePort In

Seite 1403 - Disabling the SSH Server

Chapter 31: Multicast Commands516SWITCHPORT BLOCK EGRESS-MULTICASTSyntaxswitchport block egress-multicastParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescript

Seite 1404 - Deleting Encryption Keys

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide517SWITCHPORT BLOCK INGRESS-MULTICASTSyntaxswitchport block ingress-multicastParametersNoneModePort Interfac

Seite 1405 - Displaying the SSH Server

Chapter 31: Multicast Commands518

Seite 1406

519Section IIIFile SystemThis section contains the following chapters: Chapter 32, “File System” on page 521 Chapter 33, “File System Commands” on p

Seite 1407 - SSH Server Commands

Chapter 1: AlliedWare Plus Command Line Interface52Management SessionsYou can manage the switch locally or remotely. Local management is conducted thr

Seite 1409

521Chapter 32File SystemThis chapter discusses the following topics: “Overview” on page 522 “Copying Boot Configuration Files” on page 523 “Renamin

Seite 1410 - CRYPTO KEY GENERATE HOSTKEY

Chapter 32: File System522OverviewThe file system in the switch stores the following types of files: Boot configuration files Encryption key pairsTh

Seite 1411

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide523Copying Boot Configuration FilesMaintaining a history of the configuration settings of the switch can pro

Seite 1412 - NO SERVICE SSH

Chapter 32: File System524Renaming Boot Configuration FilesTo rename boot configuration files in the file system, use the MOVE command, found in the P

Seite 1413 - SERVICE SSH

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide525Deleting Boot Configuration FilesIf the file system becomes cluttered with unnecessary configuration file

Seite 1414 - SHOW CRYPTO KEY HOSTKEY

Chapter 32: File System526Displaying the Specifications of the File SystemThe User Exec mode and the Privileged Exec mode have a command that lets you

Seite 1415 - SHOW SSH SERVER

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide527Listing the Files in the File SystemTo view the names of the files in the file system of the switch, use

Seite 1416

Chapter 32: File System528

Seite 1417 - Chapter 90

529Chapter 33File System CommandsThe file system commands are summarized in Table 54.Table 54. File System CommandsCommand Mode Description“COPY” on p

Seite 1418

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide53To support remote management, the switch must have a management IP address. For instructions on how to ass

Seite 1419

Chapter 33: File System Commands530COPYSyntaxcopy sourcefile.cfg destinationfile.cfgParameterssourcefile.cfgSpecifies the name of the boot configurati

Seite 1420

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide531DELETESyntaxdelete filename.cfgParameterfilename.cfgSpecifies the name of the boot configuration file to

Seite 1421

Chapter 33: File System Commands532DELETE FORCESyntaxdelete force filename.extParameterfilename.extSpecifies the name of the boot configuration file t

Seite 1422 - HTTP server enabled. Port 80

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide533DIRSyntaxdirParameterNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to list the names of the fil

Seite 1423

Chapter 33: File System Commands534MOVESyntaxmove filename1.cfg filename2.cfgParametersfilename1.cfgSpecifies the name of the boot configuration file

Seite 1424 - SERVICE HTTP

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide535SHOW FILE SYSTEMSSyntaxshow file systemsParameterNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command

Seite 1425 - IP HTTP PORT

Chapter 33: File System Commands536ExampleThe following example displays the specifications of the file system:awplus# show file systemsLcl/Ntwk Wheth

Seite 1426 - NO SERVICE HTTP

537Chapter 34Boot Configuration FilesThis chapter discusses the following topics: “Overview” on page 538 “Specifying the Active Boot Configuration F

Seite 1427 - SHOW IP HTTP

Chapter 34: Boot Configuration Files538OverviewThe changes that you make to the parameters settings of the switch are saved as a series of commands in

Seite 1428

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide539Specifying the Active Boot Configuration FileTo create or designate a new active boot configuration file

Seite 1429 - Chapter 92

Chapter 1: AlliedWare Plus Command Line Interface54The switch supports the following MIBs for SNMP management: atistackinfo.mib atiEdgeSwtich.mib R

Seite 1430

Chapter 34: Boot Configuration Files540Here are a couple examples of the command. The first example creates a new active boot configuration file calle

Seite 1431 - Distinguished

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide541Creating a New Boot Configuration FileIt is a good idea to periodically make copies of the current config

Seite 1432

Chapter 34: Boot Configuration Files542Displaying the Active Boot Configuration FileTo display the name of the active boot configuration file on the s

Seite 1433 - generate

543Chapter 35Boot Configuration File CommandsThe boot configuration file commands are summarized in Table 56 and described in detail within the chapte

Seite 1434

Chapter 35: Boot Configuration File Commands544BOOT CONFIG-FILESyntaxboot config-file filename.cfgParameterfilenameSpecifies the name of a boot config

Seite 1435

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide545Confirmation Command“SHOW BOOT” on page 550.ExamplesThis example designates a file called “region2asw.cfg

Seite 1436

Chapter 35: Boot Configuration File Commands546COPY RUNNING-CONFIGSyntaxcopy running-config filename.cfgParameterfilenameSpecifies a name for a new bo

Seite 1437

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide547COPY RUNNING-CONFIG STARTUP-CONFIGSyntaxcopy running-config startup-configParametersNoneModePrivileged Ex

Seite 1438

Chapter 35: Boot Configuration File Commands548ERASE STARTUP-CONFIGSyntaxerase startup-configParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this

Seite 1439

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide549NO BOOT CONFIG-FILESyntaxno boot config-fileParameterNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this

Seite 1440

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide55Management InterfacesThe switch has two management interfaces: AlliedWare Plus command line Web browser

Seite 1441

Chapter 35: Boot Configuration File Commands550SHOW BOOTSyntaxshow bootParameterNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to display the

Seite 1442

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide551ExampleThis command displays the name of the active boot configuration file and the version numbers of th

Seite 1443

Chapter 35: Boot Configuration File Commands552SHOW STARTUP-CONFIGSyntaxshow startup-configParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this c

Seite 1444 - CRYPTO CERTIFICATE DESTROY

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide553WRITESyntaxwriteParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to update the active bo

Seite 1445 - CRYPTO CERTIFICATE GENERATE

Chapter 35: Boot Configuration File Commands554

Seite 1446

555Chapter 36File TransferThis chapter discusses the following topics: “Overview” on page 556 “Uploading or Downloading Files with TFTP” on page 557

Seite 1447

Chapter 36: File Transfer556OverviewThis chapter discusses how to download files onto the switch and upload files onto the switch. You can download th

Seite 1448 - CRYPTO CERTIFICATE IMPORT

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide557Uploading or Downloading Files with TFTP “Downloading New Management Software with TFTP” next “Download

Seite 1449 - CRYPTO CERTIFICATE REQUEST

Chapter 36: File Transfer558The IPADDRESS parameter is the IP address of the TFTP server, and the FILENAME parameter is the name of the new management

Seite 1450

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide559In this example of the command, the IP address of the TFTP server is 152.34.67.8, and the filename of the

Seite 1451 - SERVICE HTTPS

Chapter 1: AlliedWare Plus Command Line Interface56Local Manager AccountYou must log on to manage the switch. This requires a valid user name and pass

Seite 1452 - IP HTTPS CERTIFICATE

Chapter 36: File Transfer560To upload a file from the file system of the switch using TFTP:1. Start a local or remote management session on the switch

Seite 1453 - NO SERVICE HTTPS

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide561Uploading or Downloading Files with Zmodem “Downloading Files to the Switch with Zmodem” next “Uploadin

Seite 1454 - SHOW CRYPTO CERTIFICATE

Chapter 36: File Transfer5627. At this point, do one of the following: To configure the switch using the settings in the newly designated active boot

Seite 1455 - SHOW IP HTTPS

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide563After you enter the command, the switch displays this message:Waiting to send ...4. Use your terminal or

Seite 1456

Chapter 36: File Transfer564Downloading Files with Enhanced StackingIf you are using the enhanced stacking feature, you can automate the process of up

Seite 1457 - RADIUS and TACACS+ Clients

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide5654. Enter the ID numbers of the switches to receive the management software from the command switch. The I

Seite 1458

Chapter 36: File Transfer566

Seite 1459 - Remote Manager Accounts

567Chapter 37File Transfer CommandsThe file transfer commands are summarized in Table 58 and described in detail within the chapter.Table 58. File Tra

Seite 1460

Chapter 37: File Transfer Commands568COPY FILENAME ZMODEMSyntax:copy filename.cfg zmodemParametersfilenameSpecifies the filename of a configuration fi

Seite 1461

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide569COPY FLASH TFTPSyntaxcopy flash tftp ipaddress filenameParametersipaddressSpecifies the IP address of a T

Seite 1462 - Managing the RADIUS Client

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide57AlliedWare Plus Command ModesThe AlliedWare Plus command line interface consists of a series of modes that

Seite 1463 - Server Timeout

Chapter 37: File Transfer Commands570COPY TFTP FLASHSyntaxcopy tftp flash ipaddress filenameParametersipaddressSpecifies the IP address of a TFTP serv

Seite 1464

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide571ExamplesThis example downloads the new management software file “atFS970M_app.img” to the switch from a T

Seite 1465 - RADIUS Client

Chapter 37: File Transfer Commands572COPY ZMODEMSyntaxcopy zmodemParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command together with a Zmo

Seite 1466 - Managing the TACACS+ Client

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide573UPLOAD IMAGE REMOTELISTSyntaxupload image remotelistParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptio

Seite 1467

Chapter 37: File Transfer Commands574

Seite 1468

575Section IVSnoopingThis section contains the following chapters: Chapter 38, “Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Snooping” on page 577 Chap

Seite 1470

577Chapter 38Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) SnoopingThis chapter discusses the following topics: “Overview” on page 578 “Host Node Topolo

Seite 1471

Chapter 38: Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Snooping578OverviewIGMP snooping allows the switch to control the flow of multicast packets from

Seite 1472

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide579improves switch performance and network security by restricting the flow of multicast packets to only tho

Seite 1473 - RADIUS and TACACS+ Client

Chapter 1: AlliedWare Plus Command Line Interface58NoteBy default, the mode prompts are prefixed with the “awplus” string. To change this string, use

Seite 1474

Chapter 38: Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Snooping580Host Node TopologyThe switch has a host node topology setting. You use this setting t

Seite 1475 - AAA ACCOUNTING LOGIN

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide581Enabling IGMP SnoopingThe command to enable IGMP Snooping on the switch is the IP IGMP SNOOPING command i

Seite 1476 - Confirmation Commands

Chapter 38: Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Snooping582Configuring the IGMP Snooping CommandsThis table lists the IGMP Snooping commands wit

Seite 1477 - tacacs [

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide583This example limits the switch to two multicast groups and specifies that there is only one host node per

Seite 1478

Chapter 38: Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Snooping584Disabling IGMP SnoopingThe command to disable IGMP Snooping on the switch is the NO I

Seite 1479 - AAA AUTHENTICATION LOGIN

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide585Displaying IGMP SnoopingTo display the settings of IGMP Snooping and its status, use the SHOW IP IGMP SNO

Seite 1480

Chapter 38: Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Snooping586

Seite 1481 - IP RADIUS SOURCE-INTERFACE

587Chapter 39IGMP Snooping CommandsThe IGMP snooping commands are summarized in Table 60 and are described in detail within the chapter.Table 60. Inte

Seite 1482

Chapter 39: IGMP Snooping Commands588CLEAR IP IGMPSyntaxclear ip igmpParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to clear all IG

Seite 1483 - LOGIN AUTHENTICATION

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide589IP IGMP LIMITSyntaxip igmp limit multicastgroupsParametermulticastgroupsSpecifies the maximum number of m

Seite 1484

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide59Console Line mode awplus (config-line)#  Sets the session timer for local management sessions. Activates

Seite 1485 - NO LOGIN AUTHENTICATION

Chapter 39: IGMP Snooping Commands590IP IGMP QUERIER-TIMEOUTSyntaxip igmp querier-timeout timeoutParameterstimeoutSpecifies the time period in seconds

Seite 1486 - NO RADIUS-SERVER HOST

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide591IP IGMP SNOOPINGSyntaxip igmp snoopingParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this comm

Seite 1487 - NO TACACS-SERVER HOST

Chapter 39: IGMP Snooping Commands592IP IGMP SNOOPING FLOOD-UNKNOWN-MCASTSyntaxip igmp snooping flood-unknown-mcastParameterNoneModeGlobal Configurati

Seite 1488 - RADIUS-SERVER HOST

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide593awplus> enableawplus# configure terminalawplus(config)# ip igmp snoopingawplus(config)# ip igmp snoopi

Seite 1489

Chapter 39: IGMP Snooping Commands594IP IGMP SNOOPING MROUTERSyntaxip igmp snooping mrouter interface portParameterportSpecifies a port connected to a

Seite 1490 - RADIUS-SERVER KEY

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide595IP IGMP STATUSSyntaxip igmp status single | multipleParameterssingleActivates the single-host per port se

Seite 1491 - RADIUS-SERVER TIMEOUT

Chapter 39: IGMP Snooping Commands596NO IP IGMP SNOOPINGSyntaxno ip igmp snoopingParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this comman

Seite 1492 - SHOW RADIUS

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide597NO IP IGMP SNOOPING MROUTERSyntaxno ip igmp snooping mrouter interface portParameterportSpecifies a multi

Seite 1493

Chapter 39: IGMP Snooping Commands598SHOW IP IGMP SNOOPINGSyntaxshow ip igmp snoopingParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command

Seite 1494 - SHOW TACACS

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide599The information the command displays is explained in Table 61.Table 61. SHOW IP IGMP SNOOPING CommandPara

Seite 1495

Contents6Assigning a Name to the Switch ... 79A

Seite 1496 - TACACS-SERVER HOST

Chapter 1: AlliedWare Plus Command Line Interface60Moving Down the HierarchyTo move down the mode hierarchy, you have to step through each mode in seq

Seite 1497 - TACACS-SERVER KEY

Chapter 39: IGMP Snooping Commands600ExampleThe following example displays the IGMP snooping parameters:awplus# show ip igmp snoopingPort/Trunk ID The

Seite 1498 - TACACS-SERVER TIMEOUT

601Chapter 40IGMP Snooping QuerierThis chapter covers the following topics: “Overview” on page 602 “Guidelines” on page 606 “Configuring the Featur

Seite 1499 - Quality of Service

Chapter 40: IGMP Snooping Querier602OverviewMulticast routers are an essential part of IP multicasting. They send out queries to the network nodes to

Seite 1500

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide603Figure 117. IGMP Snooping Querier with One QuerierTable 62 lists the switch settings that are illustrated

Seite 1501 - Chapter 96

Chapter 40: IGMP Snooping Querier604network with IGMP snooping enabled and IGMP querier disabled determines the standby querier and then the second st

Seite 1502

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide6052 149.123.48.3 Enabled Disabled None3 149.123.48.4 Enabled Enabled StandbyTable 63. IGMP Snooping Querier

Seite 1503

Chapter 40: IGMP Snooping Querier606GuidelinesThe guidelines for IGMP snooping querier are listed here: The network can have only one LAN. The netwo

Seite 1504

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide607Configuring the FeatureThis section lists the IGMP snooping querier commands and describes how to configu

Seite 1505 - Creating ACLs

Chapter 40: IGMP Snooping Querier608ConfiguringMultiple QueriersThis example configures two queriers in a LAN that consists of three switches as shown

Seite 1506

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide609Log on to switch 2.awplus> enableEnter the Privileged Executive mode from the User Executive mode of s

Seite 1507

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide61LINE CONSOLE0 CommandYou use this command to move from the Global Configuration mode to the Console Line m

Seite 1508

Chapter 40: IGMP Snooping Querier610

Seite 1509

611Chapter 41IGMP Snooping Querier CommandsThe IGMP snooping querier commands are summarized in Table 67.Table 67. IGMP Snooping Querier CommandsComma

Seite 1510

Chapter 41: IGMP Snooping Querier Commands612IP IGMP QUERY-INTERVALSyntaxip igmp query-interval intervalParameterintervalSpecifies the time interval,

Seite 1511

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide613IP IGMP SNOOPING QUERIERSyntaxip igmp snooping querierParametersNoneModeVLAN Interface modeDescriptionUse

Seite 1512

Chapter 41: IGMP Snooping Querier Commands614NO IP IGMP SNOOPING QUERIERSyntaxno ip igmp snooping querierParametersNoneModeVLAN Interface modeDescript

Seite 1513

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide615SHOW IP IGMP INTERFACESyntaxshow ip igmp interface vlanidParametersvlanidSpecifies a VLAN ID, for example

Seite 1514

Chapter 41: IGMP Snooping Querier Commands616ExampleThis example displays the status of IGMP snooping querier on the Default VLAN, which has the ID nu

Seite 1515

617Chapter 42DHCP Snooping CommandsThe DHCP commands are summarized in Table 69 and are described in detail within the chapter.Table 69. DHCP Commands

Seite 1516

Chapter 42: DHCP Snooping Commands618“IP DHCP SNOOPING MAX-BINDINGS” on page 633Port Interface modeSets the maximum number of DHCP lease entries that

Seite 1517 - Numbered MAC

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide619ARP SECURITYSyntaxarp security ParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse this command to enable

Seite 1518

Chapter 1: AlliedWare Plus Command Line Interface62This example adds to a traffic class a flow group with the ID number 1:Figure 8. CLASS CommandINTER

Seite 1519 - IPv4 Address

Chapter 42: DHCP Snooping Commands620ARP SECURITY VIOLATIONSyntaxarp security violation link-down|log|trapParametersviolationSpecifies one of the foll

Seite 1520

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide621ExampleThis example generates a log message if port 17 experiences an ARP security violation:awplus> e

Seite 1521 - IPv6 Address

Chapter 42: DHCP Snooping Commands622CLEAR ARP SECURITY STATISTICSSyntaxclear arp security statistics interface port-listParametersinterfaceSpecifies

Seite 1522

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide623CLEAR IP DHCP SNOOPING BINDINGSyntaxclear ip dhcp snooping binding ipaddr interface <port-list> vla

Seite 1523 - Assigning ACLs to Ports

Chapter 42: DHCP Snooping Commands624ExampleThis example removes all of the dynamic lease entries from the DHCP snooping database for a client with an

Seite 1524 - Address ACLs to

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide625CLEAR IP DHCP SNOOPING STATISTICSSyntaxclear dhcp snooping statistics interface port-listParametersinterf

Seite 1525 - IPv4 ACLs

Chapter 42: DHCP Snooping Commands626IP DHCP SNOOPINGSyntaxip dhcp snoopingParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command to e

Seite 1526 - IPv6 ACLs

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide627IP DHCP SNOOPING AGENT-OPTIONSyntaxip dhcp snooping agent-optionParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration mo

Seite 1527 - Removing ACLs from Ports

Chapter 42: DHCP Snooping Commands628IP DHCP SNOOPING AGENT-OPTION ALLOW-UNTRUSTEDSyntaxip dhcp snooping agent-option allow-untrusted ParametersNoneMo

Seite 1528 - Removing Named

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide629IP DHCP SNOOPING BINDINGSyntaxip dhcp snooping binding ipaddr macaddr (vlan vid) (interface port) (expiry

Seite 1529

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide63Figure 12. INTERFACE PORT Command - Moving Between Port Interface ModesINTERFACECommand -Static Port Trunk

Seite 1530 - Deleting ACLs from the Switch

Chapter 42: DHCP Snooping Commands630Use the no version of the command, the NO IP DHCP SNOOPING BINDING command, to restore the delete a dynamic entry

Seite 1531

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide631IP DHCP SNOOPING DELETE-BY-CLIENTSyntaxip dhcp snooping delete-by-client ParametersNoneModeGlobal Configu

Seite 1532

Chapter 42: DHCP Snooping Commands632IP DHCP SNOOPING DELETE-BY-LINKDOWNSyntaxip dhcp snooping delete-by-linkdown ParametersNoneModeGlobal Configurati

Seite 1533 - Setting ACL Time Ranges

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide633IP DHCP SNOOPING MAX-BINDINGSSyntaxip dhcp snooping max-bindings <0 - 520>Parametersmax-bindingsSpe

Seite 1534

Chapter 42: DHCP Snooping Commands634ExampleThis example sets the maximum number of bindings that can be stored in the DHCP snooping database to 10 pe

Seite 1535 - Displaying the ACLs

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide635IP DHCP SNOOPING SUBSCRIBER-IDSyntaxip dhcp snooping subscriber-id <sub-id>Parameterssub-idSpecifie

Seite 1536

Chapter 42: DHCP Snooping Commands636ExamplesThis example assigns port 3 a subscriber ID of “room_534:”awplus> enableawplus# configure terminalawpl

Seite 1537

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide637IP DHCP SNOOPING TRUSTSyntaxip dhcp snooping trustParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse thi

Seite 1538

Chapter 42: DHCP Snooping Commands638IP DHCP VERIFY MAC-ADDRESSSyntaxip dhcp verify mac-address ParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescription

Seite 1539 - ACL Commands

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide639This example disables MAC address verification on the switch:awplus> enableawplus# configure terminala

Seite 1540 - Chapter 97: ACL Commands

Chapter 1: AlliedWare Plus Command Line Interface64Figure 15. VLAN DATABASE CommandLOCATIONCIVIC-LOCATIONCommandYou use this command to move from the

Seite 1541

Chapter 42: DHCP Snooping Commands640IP DHCP SNOOPING VIOLATIONSyntaxip dhcp snooping violation log|trap|link-downParameterslogGenerates a log message

Seite 1542 - ABSOLUTE START

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide641Confirmation Command“NO LOG BUFFERED” on page 677“SNMP-SERVER ENABLE TRAP” on page 1150.ExampleThis examp

Seite 1543

Chapter 42: DHCP Snooping Commands642IP SOURCE BINDINGSyntaxip source binding <ipaddr> <macaddr> vlan <vid> interface <port>Pa

Seite 1544 - ACCESS-CLASS

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide643ExamplesThis example adds a static entry to the DHCP snooping database for a client with the IP address o

Seite 1545

Chapter 42: DHCP Snooping Commands644SERVICE DHCP SNOOPINGSyntaxservice dhcp snooping ParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this c

Seite 1546 - ACCESS-GROUP

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide645The DHCP snooping service cannot be enabled on a switch that is configured with any of the following feat

Seite 1547

Chapter 42: DHCP Snooping Commands646SHOW ARP SECURITY Syntaxshow arp security ParametersNoneModePrivilege Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to dis

Seite 1548 - ACCESS-LIST (MAC Address)

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide647Table 70. Parameters in SHOW ARP SECURITY CommandParameter DescriptionTotal VLANs enabled Specifies the n

Seite 1549

Chapter 42: DHCP Snooping Commands648SHOW ARP SECURITY INTERFACESyntaxshow arp security interface <port-list>ParametersinterfaceIndicates the li

Seite 1550

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide649Table 71. Parameters in SHOW ARP SECURITY INTERFACE CommandParameter DescriptionAction Indicates the acti

Seite 1551 - ACCESS-LIST ICMP

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide65Moving Up the HierarchyThere are four commands for moving up the mode hierarchy. They are the EXIT, QUIT,

Seite 1552

Chapter 42: DHCP Snooping Commands650SHOW ARP SECURITY STATISTICSSyntaxshow arp security statistics detail [interface <port-list>]Parametersdeta

Seite 1553

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide651Figure 123 displays sample output from the SHOW ARP SECURITY STATISTCS DETAIL command.Figure 123. SHOW AR

Seite 1554 - ACCESS-LIST IP

Chapter 42: DHCP Snooping Commands652SHOW IP DHCP SNOOPING Syntaxshow ip dhcp snooping ParametersNoneModePrivilege Exec modeDescriptionUse this comman

Seite 1555

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide653Figure 124. SHOW IP DHCP SNOOPING Commandawplus# show ip dhcp snoopingDHCP Snooping Information:DHCP Snoo

Seite 1556

Chapter 42: DHCP Snooping Commands654SHOW IP DHCP SNOOPING BINDINGSyntaxshow ip dhcp snooping binding ParametersNoneModePrivilege Exec modeDescription

Seite 1557

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide655Table 73. SHOW IP DHCP SNOOPING BINDING Command ParametersParameter DescriptionClient IP Address The IP a

Seite 1558 - ACCESS-LIST PROTO

Chapter 42: DHCP Snooping Commands656SHOW IP DHCP SNOOPING INTERFACESyntaxshow ip dhcp snooping interface port-listParametersport-listIndicates the li

Seite 1559

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide657Figure 126. SHOW IP DHCP SNOOPING INTERFACE Commandawplus# show ip dhcp snooping interface port1.0.1-port

Seite 1560

Chapter 42: DHCP Snooping Commands658SHOW IP SOURCE BINDINGSyntaxshow ip source binding ParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this comm

Seite 1561

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide659Table 75. SHOW IP DHCP SOURCE BINDING Command ParametersParameter DescriptionClient IP Address Specifies

Seite 1562

Chapter 1: AlliedWare Plus Command Line Interface66Figure 19. Returning to the Privileged Exec Mode with the END CommandDISABLECommandTo return to the

Seite 1563 - ACCESS-LIST TCP

Chapter 42: DHCP Snooping Commands660

Seite 1564

661Section VEvent MessagesThis section contains the following chapters: Chapter 43, “Event Log” on page 663 Chapter 44, “Event Log Commands” on page

Seite 1566

663Chapter 43Event LogThis chapter covers the following topics: “Overview” on page 664 “Displaying the Event Log” on page 665 “Clearing the Event L

Seite 1567 - ACCESS-LIST UDP

Chapter 43: Event Log664OverviewA managed switch is a complex piece of computer equipment that includes both hardware and software components. Multipl

Seite 1568

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide665Displaying the Event LogThere are two commands to display the messages stored in the event log. Both disp

Seite 1569

Chapter 43: Event Log666Clearing the Event LogTo clear all the messages from the event log, use the CLEAR LOG BUFFERED command in the Privileged Exec

Seite 1570

667Chapter 44Event Log CommandsThe event log commands are summarized in Table 76 and described in detail within this chapter.Table 76. Event Log Comma

Seite 1571 - IP ACCESS-LIST

Chapter 44: Event Log Commands668“SHOW LOG REVERSE” on page 689Privileged Exec Displays the event messages in the buffered log from newest to oldest.“

Seite 1572 - IP ACCESS-LIST (ICMP)

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide669CLEAR LOG Syntaxclear logParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to delete the

Seite 1573

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide67Port Numbers in CommandsThe ports on the switch are identified in the commands with the PORT parameter. Th

Seite 1574

Chapter 44: Event Log Commands670CLEAR LOG BUFFEREDSyntaxclear log bufferedParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to delete

Seite 1575 - IP ACCESS-LIST (IP)

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide671CLEAR LOG PERMANENTSyntaxclear log permanentParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this com

Seite 1576

Chapter 44: Event Log Commands672LOG BUFFEREDSyntaxlog buffered [level level] [program program] [msgtext msgtext]]ParameterslevelSpecifies the minimum

Seite 1577

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide673The management software modules are listed in Table 79 on page 683.Confirmation Command“SHOW LOG CONFIG”

Seite 1578 - IP ACCESS-LIST (MAC)

Chapter 44: Event Log Commands674LOG CONSOLESyntaxlog console [level level]|[program program]|[msgtext msgtext]ParameterslevelSpecifies the minimum se

Seite 1579

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide675ExamplesThis example configures the switch to send to the console only those event messages that have the

Seite 1580

Chapter 44: Event Log Commands676LOG PERMANENTSyntaxlog permanent [level level]|[program program]|[msgtext msgtext]ParameterslevelSpecifies the minimu

Seite 1581 - IP ACCESS-LIST (PROTO)

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide677NO LOG BUFFEREDSyntaxno log buffered [level level]|[program program]|[msgtext msgtext]ParameterslevelSpec

Seite 1582

Chapter 44: Event Log Commands678awplus# configure terminalawplus(config)# no log buffered Program macOUtputID Type Status Details--------------------

Seite 1583

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide679NO LOG CONSOLESyntaxno log console [level level]|[program program]|[msgtext msgtext]ParameterslevelSpecif

Seite 1584 - IP ACCESS-LIST (TCP)

Chapter 1: AlliedWare Plus Command Line Interface68You can also combine individual ports and port ranges in the same command, as illustrated in these

Seite 1585

Chapter 44: Event Log Commands680NO LOG PERMANENTSyntaxno log permanent [level level]|[program program]|[msgtext msgtext]ParameterslevelSpecifies the

Seite 1586

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide681awplus# configure terminalawplus(config)# no log permanent Program macOUtputID Type Status Details-------

Seite 1587

Chapter 44: Event Log Commands682SHOW LOGSyntaxshow logParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to display the messages in th

Seite 1588 - IP ACCESS-LIST (UDP)

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide683Table 79 lists the modules and their abbreviations.Severity (continued) Warning: The issue reported by t

Seite 1589

Chapter 44: Event Log Commands684ExampleThe following command displays the messages in the event log:awplus# show logPKI Public Key InfrastructurePMIR

Seite 1590

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide685SHOW LOG CONFIGSyntaxshow log configParametersNoneModesPrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to

Seite 1591

Chapter 44: Event Log Commands686This command is also used to view the configuration of the syslog client. For information, refer to “SHOW LOG CONFIG”

Seite 1592 - IPV6 ACCESS-LIST

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide687SHOW LOG PERMANENTSyntaxshow log permanentParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this comma

Seite 1593 - IPV6 ACCESS-LIST (ICMP)

Chapter 44: Event Log Commands688SHOW LOG PERMANENT TAILSyntaxshow log permanent tail [number]ParametersnumberSpecifies the number of log entries to d

Seite 1594

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide689SHOW LOG REVERSESyntaxshow log reverseParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command t

Seite 1595

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide69Command FormatThe following sections describe the command line interface features and the command syntax c

Seite 1596 - IPV6 ACCESS-LIST (IP)

Chapter 44: Event Log Commands690SHOW LOG TAILSyntaxshow log tail [number]ParameternumberSpecifies the number of event messages to display. The range

Seite 1597

691Chapter 45Syslog ClientThis chapter covers the following topics: “Overview” on page 692 “Creating Syslog Server Definitions” on page 693 “Deleti

Seite 1598

Chapter 45: Syslog Client692OverviewThe switch has a syslog client. The client enables the switch to send its event messages to syslog servers on your

Seite 1599 - IPV6 ACCESS-LIST (PROTO)

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide693Creating Syslog Server DefinitionsTo configure the switch to send event messages to a syslog server, crea

Seite 1600

Chapter 45: Syslog Client694ENCO Encryption keysESTACK Enhanced stackingEVTLOG Event logFILE File systemGARP GARP GVRPHTTP Web serverIGMPSNOOP IGMP sn

Seite 1601

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide695This example of the command creates a new syslog definition for a syslog server that has the IP address 1

Seite 1602 - IPV6 ACCESS-LIST (TCP)

Chapter 45: Syslog Client696Deleting Syslog Server DefinitionsTo delete syslog server definitions from the switch, use the NO LOG HOST command in the

Seite 1603

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide697Displaying the Syslog Server DefinitionsTo view the IP addresses of the syslog servers use the SHOW LOG C

Seite 1604

Chapter 45: Syslog Client698

Seite 1605

699Chapter 46Syslog Client CommandsThe syslog client commands are summarized in Table 83 and described in detail within the chapter.Table 83. Syslog C

Seite 1606 - IPV6 ACCESS-LIST (UDP)

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide7BANNER MOTD...

Seite 1607

Chapter 1: AlliedWare Plus Command Line Interface70Startup MessagesThe switch generates the following series of status messages whenever it is powered

Seite 1608

Chapter 46: Syslog Client Commands700LOG HOSTSyntaxlog host ipaddress [level level] [program program]ParametersipaddressSpecifies the IP address of a

Seite 1609

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide701This example creates a new syslog definition for a syslog server that has the IP address 149.152.122.143.

Seite 1610 - IPV6 TRAFFIC-FILTER

Chapter 46: Syslog Client Commands702NO LOG HOSTSyntaxno log host ipaddressParametersipaddressSpecifies an IP address of a syslog server.ModeGlobal Co

Seite 1611 - MAC ACCESS-GROUP

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide703SHOW LOG CONFIGSyntaxshow log configParametersNoneModesPrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to

Seite 1612 - NO ACCESS-LIST

Chapter 46: Syslog Client Commands704ExampleThis example displays the configurations of the syslog server entries:awplus# show log config

Seite 1613 - NO ACCESS-GROUP

705Section VIPort TrunksThis section contains the following chapters: Chapter 47, “Static Port Trunks” on page 707 Chapter 48, “Static Port Trunk Co

Seite 1615 - PERIODIC

707Chapter 47Static Port TrunksThis chapter covers the following topics: “Overview” on page 708 “Creating New Static Port Trunks or Adding Ports To

Seite 1616

Chapter 47: Static Port Trunks708OverviewStatic port trunks are groups of two to eight ports that act as single virtual links between the switch and o

Seite 1617 - PERIODIC (DAILY)

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide709 Source IP Address (Layer 3) Destination IP Address (Layer 3) Source IP Address / Destination IP Addre

Seite 1618 - 6 pm Sunday evening:

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide71Figure 23. Startup Messages (continued)Initializing System ... done!Initiali

Seite 1619 - SHOW ACCESS-LIST

Chapter 47: Static Port Trunks710For example, assume you selected source and destination MAC addresses for the load distribution method in our previou

Seite 1620

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide711are compatible with the device to which the trunk will be connected. When you create a static port trunk,

Seite 1621 - SHOW INTERFACE ACCESS-GROUP

Chapter 47: Static Port Trunks712Creating New Static Port Trunks or Adding Ports To Existing TrunksThe command to create new static port trunks or to

Seite 1622 - SHOW IPV6 ACCESS-LIST

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide713Specifying the Load Distribution MethodThe load distribution method defines how the switch distributes th

Seite 1623 - SHOW TIME-RANGE

Chapter 47: Static Port Trunks714Removing Ports from Static Port Trunks or Deleting TrunksTo remove ports from a static port trunk, enter the Port Int

Seite 1624 - TIME-RANGE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide715Displaying Static Port TrunksTo display the member ports of static port trunks, use the SHOW STATIC-CHANN

Seite 1625 - Quality of Service (QoS)

Chapter 47: Static Port Trunks716

Seite 1626

717Chapter 48Static Port Trunk CommandsThe static port trunk commands are summarized in Table 84 and described in detail within the chapter..Table 84.

Seite 1627 -  Peak Burst Size (PBS)

Chapter 48: Static Port Trunk Commands718NO STATIC-CHANNEL-GROUPSyntaxno static-channel-groupParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse this

Seite 1628 - Enabling QoS on the Switch

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide719PORT-CHANNEL LOAD-BALANCESyntaxport-channel load-balance src-mac|dst-mac|src-dst-mac|src-ip|dst-ip|src-ds

Seite 1629 - Creating a Class Map

Chapter 1: AlliedWare Plus Command Line Interface72Figure 24. Startup Messages (continued)Initializing FTAB ... done!I

Seite 1630 - Procedures

Chapter 48: Static Port Trunk Commands720ExampleThis example sets the load distribution method to destination MAC address for a trunk with an ID numbe

Seite 1631

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide721SHOW STATIC-CHANNEL-GROUPSyntaxshow static-channel-groupParametersNoneModesUser Exec mode and Privileged

Seite 1632

Chapter 48: Static Port Trunk Commands722STATIC-CHANNEL-GROUPSyntaxstatic-channel-group id_numberParametersid_numberSpecifies an ID number of a static

Seite 1633

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide723 Ports can be members of just one static port trunk at a time. A port that is already a member of a trun

Seite 1634

Chapter 48: Static Port Trunk Commands724

Seite 1635 - Adding a VLAN to a Class Map

725Chapter 49Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)This chapter covers the following topics: “Overview” on page 726 “Creating New Aggregators” on

Seite 1636 - Creating a Policy Map

Chapter 49: Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)726OverviewThe Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) is used to increase the bandwidth between

Seite 1637

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide727Base Port The lowest numbered port in an aggregator is referred to as the base port. You cannot change th

Seite 1638 -  Deny unspecified traffic

Chapter 49: Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)728 The load distribution method is applied at the aggregator level. For further information, ref

Seite 1639 - Prioritizing CoS and DSCP

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide729Creating New AggregatorsTo create a new aggregator, move to the Port Interface mode of the aggregator’s m

Seite 1640

73Chapter 2Starting a Management SessionThis chapter has the following sections: “Starting a Local Management Session” on page 74 “Starting a Remote

Seite 1641

Chapter 49: Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)730Setting the Load Distribution MethodThe load distribution method determines the manner in which

Seite 1642 - Creating a Twin-rate Policer

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide731Adding Ports to AggregatorsThe command to add ports to existing aggregators is the same command to create

Seite 1643

Chapter 49: Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)732Removing Ports from AggregatorsTo remove ports from an aggregator, use the NO CHANNEL-GROUP com

Seite 1644 - Creating an Aggregate Policer

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide733Deleting AggregatorsTo delete an aggregator, remove all its ports with the NO CHANNEL-GROUP command, in t

Seite 1645

Chapter 49: Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)734Displaying AggregatorsThere are five SHOW commands for LACP. Two of them are mentioned here. Fo

Seite 1646 - Command Description

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide735Here is an example of the information.Figure 138. SHOW LACP SYS-ID CommandIt should be mentioned that whi

Seite 1647 - Configuring the Egress Queues

Chapter 49: Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)736

Seite 1648 - Egress Queues

737Chapter 50LACP CommandsThe LACP port trunk commands are summarized in Table 85 and described in detail within the chapter.Table 85. LACP Port Trunk

Seite 1649

Chapter 50: LACP Commands738CHANNEL-GROUPSyntaxchannel-group id_numberParametersid_numberSpecifies the ID number of a new or an existing aggregator. T

Seite 1650

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide739ExamplesThese commands create a new aggregator consisting of ports 11 to 16. The ID number of the aggrega

Seite 1651

Chapter 2: Starting a Management Session74Starting a Local Management SessionTo start a local management session on the switch, perform the following

Seite 1652 - Egress Queue

Chapter 50: LACP Commands740LACP SYSTEM-PRIORITYSyntaxlacp system-priority priorityParametersprioritySpecifies the LACP system priority value for the

Seite 1653 - <0-15>

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide741NO CHANNEL-GROUPSyntaxno channel-groupParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse this command to

Seite 1654

Chapter 50: LACP Commands742PORT-CHANNEL LOAD-BALANCESyntaxport-channel load-balance src-mac|dst-mac|src-dst-mac|src-ip|dst-ip|src-dst-ipParameterssrc

Seite 1655

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide743Confirmation Command“SHOW ETHERCHANNEL DETAIL” on page 745ExampleThis example sets the load distribution

Seite 1656 - Auto-QoS Macro

Chapter 50: LACP Commands744SHOW ETHERCHANNELSyntaxshow etherchannel id_numberParametersid_numberSpecifies the ID number of the aggregator.ModePrivile

Seite 1657

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide745SHOW ETHERCHANNEL DETAILSyntaxshow etherchannel detailParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUs

Seite 1658

Chapter 50: LACP Commands746ExampleThis example displays detailed information about aggregators:awplus# show etherchannel detail

Seite 1659 - Auto-QoS Functionality

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide747SHOW ETHERCHANNEL SUMMARYSyntaxshow etherchannel summaryParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescription

Seite 1660

Chapter 50: LACP Commands748SHOW LACP SYS-IDSyntaxshow lacp sys-idParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to display the LAC

Seite 1661 - Macro Examples

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide749SHOW PORT ETHERCHANNELSyntaxshow port etherchannel [interface port]ParametersportSpecifies the port of an

Seite 1662

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide75The local management session has started when the AlliedWare Plus command line prompt, shown in Figure 26

Seite 1663 - Support

Chapter 50: LACP Commands750

Seite 1664

751Section VIISpanning Tree ProtocolsThis section contains the following chapters: Chapter 51, “STP, RSTP and MSTP Protocols” on page 753 Chapter 52

Seite 1666

753Chapter 51STP, RSTP and MSTP ProtocolsThis chapter covers the following topics: “Overview” on page 754 “Bridge Priority and the Root Bridge” on p

Seite 1667

Chapter 51: STP, RSTP and MSTP Protocols754OverviewThe Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) and Multiple Spanning Tree Pr

Seite 1668 - Displaying QoS Settings

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide755Bridge Priority and the Root BridgeThe first task that bridges perform when a spanning tree protocol is a

Seite 1669 - Class Map

Chapter 51: STP, RSTP and MSTP Protocols756Path Costs and Port CostsAfter the root bridge has been selected, the bridges determine if the network cont

Seite 1670

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide757Port PriorityIf two paths have the same port cost, the bridges must select a preferred path. In some inst

Seite 1671 - Queue Mappings

Chapter 51: STP, RSTP and MSTP Protocols758Forwarding Delay and Topology ChangesIf there is a change in the network topology due to a failure, removal

Seite 1672 - Mappings

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide759Hello Time and Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDU)The bridges that are part of a spanning tree domain commu

Seite 1673

Chapter 2: Starting a Management Session76Starting a Remote Telnet or SSH Management SessionHere are the requirements for remote management of the swi

Seite 1674 - <0-63>

Chapter 51: STP, RSTP and MSTP Protocols760Point-to-Point and Edge PortsPart of the task of configuring RSTP or MSTP is defining the port types on the

Seite 1675 - Chapter 99

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide761Figure 145. Edge PortA port can be both a point-to-point and an edge port at the same time. It operates i

Seite 1676

Chapter 51: STP, RSTP and MSTP Protocols762Mixed STP and RSTP NetworksRSTP IEEE 802.1w is fully compliant with STP IEEE 802.1d. A network can have bot

Seite 1677

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide763Spanning Tree and VLANsSTP and RSTP support a single-instance spanning tree that encompasses all the port

Seite 1678

Chapter 51: STP, RSTP and MSTP Protocols764RSTP and MSTP BPDU GuardThis feature monitors the RSTP or MSTP edge ports on the switch for BPDU packets. E

Seite 1679 - AUTO-QOS

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide765Here are the guidelines to this feature: BPDU guard is configured for each port and has only two possibl

Seite 1680

Chapter 51: STP, RSTP and MSTP Protocols766STP, RSTP, MSTP Loop GuardAlthough spanning tree is designed to detect and prevent the formation of loops i

Seite 1681 - AUTO-QOS-MED

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide767If you configured the SNMP community strings on the switch, an SNMP trap is sent to your management works

Seite 1682

Chapter 51: STP, RSTP and MSTP Protocols768Figure 149. Loop Guard Example 2But if loop guard is enabled on port 14 on switch 3, the port, instead of c

Seite 1683

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide769is not using loop guard, it continues to forward traffic on port 4. But since no BPDUs are received on th

Seite 1684

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide77VTY Lines The switch has ten VTY (virtual teletypewriter) lines. Each line supports one remote Telnet or S

Seite 1685 - CLASS-MAP

Chapter 51: STP, RSTP and MSTP Protocols770Figure 152. Loop Guard Example 5

Seite 1686 - DEFAULT-ACTION

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide771STP and RSTP Root GuardThe Root Guard feature enforces the root bridge placement in a network. It ensures

Seite 1687

Chapter 51: STP, RSTP and MSTP Protocols772

Seite 1688 - DESCRIPTION (Policy Map)

773Chapter 52Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) ProceduresThis chapter provides the following procedures: “Designating STP as the Active Spanning Tree Prot

Seite 1689

Chapter 52: Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) Procedures774Designating STP as the Active Spanning Tree ProtocolBefore you can configure the STP parameters

Seite 1690 - MATCH ACCESS-GROUP

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide775Enabling the Spanning Tree ProtocolTo enable STP on the switch, use the SPANNING-TREE STP ENABLE command

Seite 1691

Chapter 52: Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) Procedures776Setting the Switch ParametersThis table lists the STP functions that are controlled at the switc

Seite 1692

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide777This example of the command sets the switch’s priority value to 8,192: awplus> enableawplus# configure

Seite 1693 - MATCH COS

Chapter 52: Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) Procedures778Setting the Port ParametersThis table lists the STP functions that are controlled at the port le

Seite 1694

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide779Disabling the Spanning Tree ProtocolTo disable STP on the switch, use the NO SPANNING-TREE STP ENABLE com

Seite 1695 - MATCH DSCP

Chapter 2: Starting a Management Session78What to Configure FirstHere are a few suggestions on what to configure during your initial management sessio

Seite 1696 - MATCH IP-PRECEDENCE

Chapter 52: Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) Procedures780Displaying STP SettingsTo view the STP settings on the switch, use the SHOW SPANNING-TREE in the

Seite 1697 - MATCH MAC-TYPE

781Chapter 53STP CommandsThe STP commands are summarized in Table 88 and described in detail within the chapter.Table 88. Spanning Tree Protocol Comma

Seite 1698

Chapter 53: STP Commands782“SPANNING-TREE PORTFAST BPDU-GUARD” on page 793Port Interface Enables the BPDU guard feature on a port so that the switch m

Seite 1699 - MATCH PROTOCOL

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide783NO SPANNING-TREE STP ENABLESyntaxno spanning-tree stp enableParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDe

Seite 1700

Chapter 53: STP Commands784SHOW SPANNING-TREESyntaxshow spanning-tree [interface port]ParametersportSpecifies a port. You can specify more than one po

Seite 1701

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide785ExamplesThis command displays the STP settings for all the ports:awplus# show spanning-treeThis command d

Seite 1702

Chapter 53: STP Commands786SPANNING-TREE FORWARD-TIMESyntaxspanning-tree forward-time forwardtimeParametersforwardtimeSpecifies the forward time. The

Seite 1703 - ARP to it:

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide787SPANNING-TREE GUARD ROOTSyntaxspanning-tree guard root ParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUs

Seite 1704 - MATCH TCP-FLAGS

Chapter 53: STP Commands788SPANNING-TREE HELLO-TIMESyntaxspanning-tree hello-time hellotimeParametershellotimeSpecifies the hello time. The range is 1

Seite 1705

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide789SPANNING-TREE MAX-AGESyntaxspanning-tree max-age maxageParametersmaxageSpecifies the max-age parameter. T

Seite 1706 - MATCH VLAN

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide79Figure 27. SHOW BOOT CommandThe name of your new active boot configuration file is displayed in the “Curre

Seite 1707

Chapter 53: STP Commands790SPANNING-TREE MODE STPSyntaxspanning-tree mode stpParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command to

Seite 1708

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide791SPANNING-TREE PATH-COSTSyntaxspanning-tree path-cost path-costParameterspath-costSpecifies the cost of a

Seite 1709

Chapter 53: STP Commands792SPANNING-TREE PORTFASTSyntaxspanning-tree portfastParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse this command to desig

Seite 1710

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide793SPANNING-TREE PORTFAST BPDU-GUARDSyntaxspanning-tree portfast bpdu-guardParametersNoneModePort Interface

Seite 1711

Chapter 53: STP Commands794SPANNING-TREE PRIORITY (Bridge Priority)Syntaxspanning-tree priority priorityParametersprioritySpecifies a priority number

Seite 1712

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide795SPANNING-TREE Priority (Port Priority)Syntaxspanning-tree priority priorityParametersprioritySpecifies th

Seite 1713 - MLS QOS COS

Chapter 53: STP Commands796SPANNING-TREE STP ENABLESyntaxspanning-tree stp enableParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this comman

Seite 1714

797Chapter 54Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) ProceduresThis chapter provides the following procedures: “Designating RSTP as the Active Spanning T

Seite 1715 - MLS QOS ENABLE

Chapter 54: Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) Procedures798Designating RSTP as the Active Spanning Tree ProtocolThe first step to using RSTP on the

Seite 1716 - MLS QOS MAP COS-QUEUE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide799Enabling the Rapid Spanning Tree ProtocolTo enable RSTP on the switch, use the SPANNING-TREE RSTP ENABLE

Seite 1717

Contents8HOLBPLIMIT ...

Seite 1718 - MLS QOS MAP DSCP-QUEUE

Chapter 2: Starting a Management Session80This example assigns the name “Engineering_sw2” to the switch:awplus> enableawplus# configure terminalawp

Seite 1719

Chapter 54: Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) Procedures800Configuring the Switch ParametersThis table lists the RSTP parameters that are set in the

Seite 1720 - MLS QOS MAP POLICED-DSCP

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide801This example increases the forward time to 25 seconds and the hello time to 8 seconds. The forward time c

Seite 1721

Chapter 54: Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) Procedures802To disable the BPDU guard feature on the switch, use the NO SPANNING-TREE BPDU-GUARD comm

Seite 1722 - <VLANID>

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide803Configuring the Port ParametersThis table lists the RSTP port parameters. These parameters are set on the

Seite 1723

Chapter 54: Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) Procedures804Configuring PortPrioritiesIf RSTP discovers a loop in the topology, but the two paths tha

Seite 1724 - NO MATCH ACCESS-GROUP

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide805This example uses the NO SPANNING-TREE command to remove port 21 as an edge port:awplus> enableawplus#

Seite 1725

Chapter 54: Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) Procedures806Edge ports that are disabled by the feature remain disabled until you manually enable the

Seite 1726 - NO MATCH PROTOCOL

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide807Disabling the Rapid Spanning Tree ProtocolTo disable RSTP on the switch, use the NO SPANNING-TREE RSTP EN

Seite 1727

Chapter 54: Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) Procedures808Displaying RSTP SettingsTo view the RSTP settings on the switch, use the SHOW SPANNING-TR

Seite 1728 - NO MLS QOS AGGREGATE-POLICE

809Chapter 55RSTP CommandsThe RSTP commands are summarized in Table 91 and described in detail within the chapter.Table 91. Rapid Spanning Tree Protoc

Seite 1729 - NO MLS QOS ENABLE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide81This example assigns the management IPv4 address to a new VLAN called Tech_Support, with the VID 5. The VL

Seite 1730 - NO POLICE AGGREGATE

Chapter 55: RSTP Commands810“SPANNING-TREE LINK-TYPE” on page 823Port Interface Designates point-to-point ports and shared ports.“SPANNING-TREE LOOP-G

Seite 1731 - POLICE AGGREGATE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide811NO SPANNING-TREE PORTFASTSyntaxno spanning-tree portfastParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionU

Seite 1732

Chapter 55: RSTP Commands812NO SPANNING-TREE ERRDISABLE-TIMEOUT ENABLESyntaxno spanning-tree errdisable-timeout enableParametersNoneModeGlobal Configu

Seite 1733 - POLICE SINGLE-RATE ACTION

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide813NO SPANNING-TREE LOOP-GUARDSyntaxno spanning-tree loop-guardParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescript

Seite 1734

Chapter 55: RSTP Commands814NO SPANNING-TREE PORTFAST BPDU-GUARDSyntaxno spanning-tree portfast bpdu-guardParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescrip

Seite 1735 - POLICE TWIN-RATE ACTION

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide815NO SPANNING-TREE RSTP ENABLESyntaxno spanning-tree rstp enableParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration mode

Seite 1736 -  maximum burst size

Chapter 55: RSTP Commands816SHOW SPANNING-TREESyntaxshow spanning-treeParametersNoneModesPrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to display th

Seite 1737 - POLICY-MAP

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide817ExampleThis example displays the RSTP settings on the switch:awplus# show spanning-tree

Seite 1738 - <0-7>

Chapter 55: RSTP Commands818SPANNING-TREE ERRDISABLE-TIMEOUT ENABLESyntaxspanning-tree errdisable-timeout enableParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration

Seite 1739

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide819SPANNING-TREE ERRDISABLE-TIMEOUT INTERVALSyntaxspanning-tree errdisable-timeout interval intervalParamete

Seite 1740 - SET DSCP

Chapter 2: Starting a Management Session82Saving YourChangesTo permanently save your changes in the active boot configuration file, use the WRITE comm

Seite 1741 - SET QUEUE

Chapter 55: RSTP Commands820SPANNING-TREE FORWARD-TIMESyntaxspanning-tree forward-time forwardtimeParametersforwardtimeSpecifies the forward time. The

Seite 1742

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide821SPANNING-TREE GUARD ROOTSyntaxspanning-tree guard root ParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUs

Seite 1743 - SERVICE-POLICY INPUT

Chapter 55: RSTP Commands822SPANNING-TREE HELLO-TIMESyntaxspanning-tree hello-time hellotimeParametershellotimeSpecifies the hello time. The range is

Seite 1744 - SHOW CLASS-MAP

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide823SPANNING-TREE LINK-TYPESyntaxspanning-tree link-type point-to-point|sharedParameterspoint-to-pointAllows

Seite 1745 - SHOW POLICY-MAP

Chapter 55: RSTP Commands824SPANNING-TREE LOOP-GUARDSyntaxspanning-tree loop-guardParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse this command to

Seite 1746

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide825SPANNING-TREE MAX-AGESyntaxspanning-tree max-age maxageParametersmaxageSpecifies the maximum age paramete

Seite 1747 - SHOW MLS QOS

Chapter 55: RSTP Commands826SPANNING-TREE MODE RSTPSyntaxspanning-tree mode rstpParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command

Seite 1748

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide827SPANNING-TREE PATH-COSTSyntaxspanning-tree path-cost path-costParameterspath-costSpecifies the cost of a

Seite 1749

Chapter 55: RSTP Commands828SPANNING-TREE PORTFASTSyntaxspanning-tree portfastParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse this command to desi

Seite 1750 - SHOW MLS QOS INTERFACE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide829SPANNING-TREE PORTFAST BPDU-GUARDSyntaxspanning-tree portfast bpdu-guardParametersNoneModePort Interface

Seite 1751 - (continued)

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide83Ending a Management SessionTo end a management session, go to either the Privileged Exec mode or the User

Seite 1752

Chapter 55: RSTP Commands830SPANNING-TREE PRIORITY (Bridge Priority)Syntaxspanning-tree priority priorityParametersprioritySpecifies a priority number

Seite 1753 - SHOW MLS QOS MAPS COS-QUEUE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide831SPANNING-TREE PRIORITY (Port Priority)Syntaxspanning-tree priority priorityParametersprioritySpecifies th

Seite 1754 - SHOW MLS QOS MAPS DSCP-QUEUE

Chapter 55: RSTP Commands832SPANNING-TREE RSTP ENABLESyntaxspanning-tree rstp enableParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this com

Seite 1755 - MAP DSCP-QUEUE” on page 1718

833Chapter 56Multiple Spanning Tree ProtocolThis chapter provides background information about the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP). It covers t

Seite 1756

Chapter 56: Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol834OverviewAs mentioned in Chapter 51, “STP, RSTP and MSTP Protocols” on page 753, STP and RSTP are referre

Seite 1757

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide835Multiple Spanning Tree Instance (MSTI)The individual spanning trees in MSTP are referred to as Multiple S

Seite 1758 - TRUST DSCP

Chapter 56: Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol836Figure 158 illustrates the same two AT-FS970M Switches and the same two virtual LANs. But in this exampl

Seite 1759

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide837Figure 159. Multiple VLANs in an MSTIIn this example, because an MSTI contains more than one VLAN, the li

Seite 1760 - [0

Chapter 56: Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol838MSTI GuidelinesFollowing are several guidelines to keep in mind about MSTIs: The AT-FS970M Switch can s

Seite 1761

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide839VLAN and MSTI AssociationsPart of the task to configuring MSTP involves assigning VLANs to spanning tree

Seite 1762 - WRR-QUEUE WEIGHT

Chapter 2: Starting a Management Session84

Seite 1763

Chapter 56: Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol840Ports in Multiple MSTIsA port can be a member of more than one MSTI at a time if it is a tagged member o

Seite 1764

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide841Multiple Spanning Tree RegionsAnother important concept of MSTP is regions. An MSTP region is defined as

Seite 1765 - QoS Storm Control Protection

Chapter 56: Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol842Table 92 illustrates the concept of regions. It shows one MSTP region consisting of two AT-FS970M Switch

Seite 1766

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide843RegionGuidelinesFollowing are several points to remember about regions. A network can contain any number

Seite 1767 - <1 - 10000000>

Chapter 56: Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol844Common andInternalSpanning Tree(CIST)MSTP has a default spanning tree instance called the Common and Int

Seite 1768 - <100 - 6000>

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide845An MSTP region can be considered as a virtual bridge. The implication is that other MSTP regions and STP

Seite 1769 - Enabling Policy-Based QSP

Chapter 56: Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol846Summary of GuidelinesCareful planning is essential for the successful implementation of MSTP. This secti

Seite 1770 - Disabling a

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide847NoteThe AlliedWare Plus MSTP implementation complies fully with the new IEEE 802.1s standard. Any other v

Seite 1771

Chapter 56: Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol848Associating VLANs to MSTIsAllied Telesis recommends that you assign all VLANs on a switch to an MSTI. Yo

Seite 1772 - Shutting Down a

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide849Figure 161. CIST and VLAN Guideline - Example 2 When port 4 on switch B receives a BPDU, the switch notes

Seite 1773

85Chapter 3Basic Command Line ManagementThis chapter contains the following sections: “Clearing the Screen” on page 86 “Displaying the On-line Help”

Seite 1774

Chapter 56: Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol850Connecting VLANs Across Different RegionsSpecial consideration needs to be taken into account when you c

Seite 1775 - Displaying Port Storm Status

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide851There are several ways to address this issue. The first is to have only one MSTP region for each subnet i

Seite 1776

Chapter 56: Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol852MSTP Root GuardThe Root Guard feature enforces the root bridge placement in a network. It ensures the po

Seite 1777 - QSP Commands

853Chapter 57MSTP CommandsThe MSTP commands are summarized in Table 94 and described in detail within the chapter.Table 94. Multiple Spanning Tree Pro

Seite 1778

Chapter 57: MSTP Commands854“SPANNING-TREE MSTP ENABLE” on page 869Global ConfigurationDesignates the MSTP mode on the switch.“SPANNING-TREE MST CONFI

Seite 1779

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide855INSTANCE MSTI-ID PRIORITYSyntaxinstance msti-id priority priorityParametersprioritySpecifies a port prior

Seite 1780 - STORM-ACTION

Chapter 57: MSTP Commands856Use the no command, NO INSTANCE MSTI-ID PRIORITY, to restore the default priority value of 32768.Confirmation Command“SHOW

Seite 1781 - “cmap2:”

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide857INSTANCE MSTI-ID VLANSyntaxinstance msti-id vlan vid|vidlistParametersvidSpecifies a VLAN ID.vidlistSpeci

Seite 1782 - STORM-DOWNTIME

Chapter 57: MSTP Commands858NO SPANNING-TREE ERRDISABLE-TIMEOUT ENABLESyntaxspanning-tree errdisable-timeout enableParametersNoneModeGlobal Configurat

Seite 1783 - STORM-PROTECTION

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide859NO SPANNING-TREE PORTFASTSyntaxno spanning-tree portfastParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionU

Seite 1784 - STORM-RATE

Chapter 3: Basic Command Line Management86Clearing the ScreenIf your screen becomes cluttered with commands, you can start fresh by entering the CLEAR

Seite 1785

Chapter 57: MSTP Commands860NO SPANNING-TREE MSTP ENABLESyntaxno spanning-tree mstp enableParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse th

Seite 1786 - STORM-WINDOW

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide861SHOW SPANNING-TREESyntaxshow spanning-treeParametersNoneModesPrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this comm

Seite 1787 - “cmap5:'

Chapter 57: MSTP Commands862SHOW SPANNING-TREE MST CONFIGSyntaxshow spanning-tree mst configParametersNoneModePrivileged Executive ModeDescriptionUse

Seite 1788 - Chapter 101: QSP Commands

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide863SHOW SPANNING-TREE MST Syntaxshow spanning-tree mst ParametersNoneModePrivileged Executive ModeDescriptio

Seite 1789 - Section XIV

Chapter 57: MSTP Commands864SHOW SPANNING-TREE MST INSTANCESyntaxshow spanning-tree mst instance <msti-id>Parametersinstance Specifies an instan

Seite 1790

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide865SPANNING-TREE ERRDISABLE-TIMEOUT ENABLESyntaxspanning-tree errdisable-timeout enableParametersNoneModeGlo

Seite 1791 - Chapter 102

Chapter 57: MSTP Commands866SPANNING-TREE ERRDISABLE-TIMEOUT INTERVALSyntaxspanning-tree errdisable-timeout interval intervalParametersintervalSpecifi

Seite 1792

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide867SPANNING-TREE GUARD ROOTSyntaxspanning-tree guard root ParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUs

Seite 1793 - Routing Interfaces

Chapter 57: MSTP Commands868SPANNING-TREE MODE MSTPSyntaxspanning-tree mode mstpParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command

Seite 1794 - Static Routes

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide869SPANNING-TREE MSTP ENABLESyntaxspanning-tree mstp enableParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescri

Seite 1795

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide87Displaying the On-line HelpThe command line interface has an on-line help system to assist you with the co

Seite 1796

Chapter 57: MSTP Commands870SPANNING-TREE MST CONFIGURATIONSyntaxspanning-tree mst configurationParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescription

Seite 1797 - Default Route

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide871SPANNING-TREE MST INSTANCESyntaxspanning-tree mst instance <1-15> Parametersinstance Specifies an i

Seite 1798 - Routing Table

Chapter 57: MSTP Commands872SPANNING-TREE PATH-COSTSyntaxspanning-tree path-cost path-costParameterspath-costSpecifies the cost of a port to the root

Seite 1799 -  1024 dynamic entries

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide873SPANNING-TREE PORTFASTSyntaxspanning-tree portfastParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse thi

Seite 1800

Chapter 57: MSTP Commands874SPANNING-TREE PORTFAST BPDU-GUARDSyntaxspanning-tree portfast bpdu-guardParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescrip

Seite 1801

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide875REGIONSyntaxregion <region-name>Parametersregion-nameSpecifies the name of an MST region. Up to 32

Seite 1802

Chapter 57: MSTP Commands876REVISIONSyntaxrevision <revision-number>Parametersrevision-numberSpecifies the revision number. The range is 0 to 25

Seite 1803 - Creating the

877Section VIIIVirtual LANsThis section contains the following chapters: Chapter 58, “Port-based and Tagged VLANs” on page 879 Chapter 59, “Port-bas

Seite 1805

879Chapter 58Port-based and Tagged VLANsThis chapter covers the following topics: “Overview” on page 880 “Port-based VLAN Overview” on page 882 “Ta

Seite 1806 - Default Routes

Chapter 3: Basic Command Line Management88Figure 30. Displaying the Class of a Parameterawplus> enableawplus# configure terminalawplus(config)# hos

Seite 1807

Chapter 58: Port-based and Tagged VLANs880OverviewA VLAN is a group of ports that form a logical Ethernet segment on an Ethernet switch. The ports of

Seite 1808

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide881Virtual LANs can also span more than one switch. This makes it possible to create VLANs of end nodes that

Seite 1809

Chapter 58: Port-based and Tagged VLANs882Port-based VLAN OverviewAs the “Overview” on page 880 explains, a VLAN consists of a group of ports that for

Seite 1810

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide883For example, if you had a port-based VLAN named Marketing that spanned three switches, assign the Marketi

Seite 1811 - IPv4 Routing Commands

Chapter 58: Port-based and Tagged VLANs884Guidelines toCreating a Port-based VLANBelow are the guidelines to creating a port-based VLAN. Each port-ba

Seite 1812

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide885Port-basedExample 1Figure 167 illustrates an example of one AT-FS970M switch with three port-based VLANs.

Seite 1813 - IP ADDRESS

Chapter 58: Port-based and Tagged VLANs886Port-basedExample 2Figure 168 on page 886 illustrates more port-based VLANs. In this example, two VLANs, Sal

Seite 1814

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide887The table below lists the port assignments for the Sales, Engineering, and Production VLANs on the switch

Seite 1815 - IP ADDRESS DHCP

Chapter 58: Port-based and Tagged VLANs888Tagged VLAN OverviewThe second type of VLAN is the tagged VLAN. VLAN membership in a tagged VLAN is determin

Seite 1816 - IP ROUTE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide889NoteFor explanations of VLAN name and VLAN identifier, refer back to “VLAN Name” on page 882 and “VLAN Id

Seite 1817

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide89Saving Your Configuration ChangesTo permanently save your changes to the parameter settings on the switch,

Seite 1818

Chapter 58: Port-based and Tagged VLANs890Tagged VLANExampleFigure 169 illustrates how tagged ports can be used to interconnect IEEE 802.1q based prod

Seite 1819 - NO IP ADDRESS

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide891The port assignments for the VLANs are described in Table 96.Table 96. VLAN Port AssignmentsSwitchSales V

Seite 1820

Chapter 58: Port-based and Tagged VLANs892This example is nearly identical to the “Port-based Example 2” on page 886. Tagged ports have been added to

Seite 1821 - NO IP ADDRESS DHCP

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide893Creating VLANsTo create VLANs, use the VLAN command in the VLAN Configuration mode. You must specify a na

Seite 1822

Chapter 58: Port-based and Tagged VLANs894Adding Untagged Ports to VLANsTo add a port to a VLAN as an untagged port, it may be necessary to first set

Seite 1823 - NO IP ROUTE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide895This example designates ports 11 to 18 as untagged ports of a VLAN with the VID 4. The SWITCHPORT MODE AC

Seite 1824

Chapter 58: Port-based and Tagged VLANs896Adding Tagged Ports to VLANsThere are three steps to adding ports as tagged ports to VLANs:1. Set the mode o

Seite 1825 - SHOW IP INTERFACE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide897This example adds ports 18 to 21 as tagged members to VLANs with the VIDs 7 and 13:awplus> enableawplu

Seite 1826

Chapter 58: Port-based and Tagged VLANs898Removing Untagged Ports from VLANsTo remove untagged ports from their current VLAN assignments and return th

Seite 1827 - SHOW IP ROUTE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide899Removing Tagged Ports from VLANsUse the SWITCHPORT TRUNK ALLOWED VLAN command to remove ports as tagged m

Seite 1828

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide9SERVICE POWER-INLINE ...

Seite 1829 - Chapter 104

Chapter 3: Basic Command Line Management90Ending a Management SessionTo end a management session, go to either the Privileged Exec mode or the User Ex

Seite 1830

Chapter 58: Port-based and Tagged VLANs900Deleting VLANsTo delete VLANs from the switch, use the NO VLAN command in the VLAN Configuration mode. You c

Seite 1831 - Enabling RIP

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide901Displaying the VLANsTo display the VLANs on the switch, use the SHOW VLAN ALL command in the User Exec mo

Seite 1832

Chapter 58: Port-based and Tagged VLANs902

Seite 1833 - Specifying a RIP Version

903Chapter 59Port-based and Tagged VLAN CommandsThe VLAN commands are summarized in Table 97 and described in detail within the chapter.Table 97. Port

Seite 1834 - Enabling Authentication

Chapter 59: Port-based and Tagged VLAN Commands904NO SWITCHPORT ACCESS VLANSyntaxno switchport access vlanParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescrip

Seite 1835

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide905NO SWITCHPORT TRUNKSyntaxno switchport trunkParametersNoneModePort Interface modeDescriptionUse this comm

Seite 1836 - S1(config)# router rip

Chapter 59: Port-based and Tagged VLAN Commands906NO SWITCHPORT TRUNK NATIVE VLANSyntaxno switchport trunk native vlanParametersNoneModePort Interface

Seite 1837 - S1(config-if)# auto-summary

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide907NO VLANSyntaxno vlan vidParametersvidSpecifies the VID of the VLAN you want to delete.ModeVLAN Configurat

Seite 1838

Chapter 59: Port-based and Tagged VLAN Commands908SHOW VLANSyntaxshow vlan vid |allParametersvidSpecifies the VID of the VLAN you want to display.allS

Seite 1839 - Advertising the Default Route

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide909ExampleThe following example displays the tagged and untagged VLANs on the switch:awplus# show vlanState

Seite 1840 - RIP command

91Chapter 4Basic Command Line Management CommandsThe basic command line commands are summarized in Table 5.Table 5. Basic Command Line CommandsCommand

Seite 1841 - Adjusting Timers

Chapter 59: Port-based and Tagged VLAN Commands910SWITCHPORT ACCESS VLANSyntaxswitchport access vlan vidParametersvidSpecifies the ID number of the VL

Seite 1842

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide911ExamplesThis example adds ports 5 and 7 as untagged ports to a VLAN with the VID 12:awplus> enableawpl

Seite 1843

Chapter 59: Port-based and Tagged VLAN Commands912SWITCHPORT MODE ACCESSSyntaxswitchport mode access [ingress-filter enable|disable]ParametersenableAc

Seite 1844

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide913SWITCHPORT MODE TRUNKSyntaxswitchport mode trunk [ingress-filter enable|disable]ParametersenableActivates

Seite 1845

Chapter 59: Port-based and Tagged VLAN Commands914This example designates port 18 as a tagged port and disables ingress filtering so that it accepts a

Seite 1846 - AUTO-SUMMARY

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide915SWITCHPORT TRUNK ALLOWED VLANSyntaxes for Adding Tagged Ports to VLANsswitchport trunk allowed vlan allsw

Seite 1847 - DEFAULT-INFORMATION ORIGINATE

Chapter 59: Port-based and Tagged VLAN Commands916 Ports can be tagged members of more than one VLAN at a time. The specified VLANs must already exi

Seite 1848 - IP RIP AUTHENTICATION STRING

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide917This example adds ports 22 to 24 as tagged ports to all the VLANs, except for the VLAN with a VID of 11.

Seite 1849 - IP RIP AUTHENTICATION MODE

Chapter 59: Port-based and Tagged VLAN Commands918SWITCHPORT TRUNK NATIVE VLANSyntaxswitchport trunk native vlan vid|noneParametersvidSpecifies the VI

Seite 1850 - IP RIP RECEIVE-PACKET

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide919This example reestablishes the Default_VLAN as the native VLAN for tagged ports 18 and 20:awplus> enab

Seite 1851 - IP RIP RECEIVE VERSION

Chapter 4: Basic Command Line Management Commands92“QUIT” on page 107 All modes except the User Exec and Privileged ExecMoves you up one mode.“WRITE”

Seite 1852

Chapter 59: Port-based and Tagged VLAN Commands920VLANSyntaxvlan vid [name name]ParametersvidSpecifies a VLAN identifier. The range is 2 to 4094. The

Seite 1853 - IP RIP SEND-PACKET

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide921DescriptionUse this command to create port-based and tagged VLANs. You can create just one VLAN at a time

Seite 1854 - IP RIP SEND VERSION

Chapter 59: Port-based and Tagged VLAN Commands922

Seite 1855 - IP RIP SPLIT-HORIZON

923Chapter 60GARP VLAN Registration ProtocolThis chapter covers the following topics: “Overview” on page 924 “Guidelines” on page 927 “GVRP and Net

Seite 1856

Chapter 60: GARP VLAN Registration Protocol924OverviewThe GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) allows network devices to share VLAN information and

Seite 1857

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide925Figure 172 provides an example of how GVRP works.Figure 172. GVRP ExampleThe example consists of three sw

Seite 1858

Chapter 60: GARP VLAN Registration Protocol926Without GVRP, you would have to manually add the Sales VLAN to switch #2. But with GVRP, the VLAN is add

Seite 1859 - NO AUTO-SUMMARY

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide927GuidelinesHere are the guidelines to GVRP: GVRP is supported with STP, RSTP, MSTP or without spanning tr

Seite 1860

Chapter 60: GARP VLAN Registration Protocol928GVRP and Network SecurityGVRP should be used with caution because it can expose your network to unauthor

Seite 1861 - NO IP RIP AUTHENTICATION MODE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide929GVRP-inactive Intermediate SwitchesIf two GVRP-active devices are separated by a GVRP-inactive switch, th

Seite 1862

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide93? (Question Mark Key)Syntax?ParametersNoneModesAll modesDescriptionUse the question mark key to display on

Seite 1863 - NO IP RIP RECEIVE-PACKET

Chapter 60: GARP VLAN Registration Protocol930Enabling GVRP on the SwitchThe command for enabling GVRP on the switch is found in the Global Configurat

Seite 1864 - NO IP RIP RECEIVE VERSION

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide931Enabling GIP on the SwitchThe GARP Information Propagation (GIP) component can be enabled separately from

Seite 1865 - NO IP RIP SEND-PACKET

Chapter 60: GARP VLAN Registration Protocol932Enabling GVRP on the PortsTo activate GVRP on the ports so that they transmit GVRP PDUs, use the GVRP RE

Seite 1866 - NO IP RIP SEND VERSION

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide933Setting the GVRP TimersThe switch has a Join Timer, a Leave Timer, and a Leave All Timer. You should not

Seite 1867 - NO IP RIP SPLIT-HORIZON

Chapter 60: GARP VLAN Registration Protocol934Disabling GVRP Timers on the SwitchTo disable GVRP timer configurations, use the NO GVRP TIMER commands

Seite 1868 - NO NETWORK

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide935Disabling GVRP on the PortsTo disable GVRP on the ports, use the GVRP REGISTRATION NONE command in the Po

Seite 1869 - NO PASSIVE-INTERFACE

Chapter 60: GARP VLAN Registration Protocol936Disabling GIP on the SwitchYou can disable the GARP Information Propagation (GIP) component separately f

Seite 1870 - NO ROUTER RIP

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide937Disabling GVRP on the SwitchTo disable GVRP to stop the switch from learning any further dynamic VLANs or

Seite 1871 - NO TIMERS BASIC

Chapter 60: GARP VLAN Registration Protocol938Restoring the GVRP Default SettingsTo disable GVRP and to return the timers to their default settings, u

Seite 1872 - NO VERSION

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide939Displaying GVRPAlthough there are five commands that display GVRP information, you will probably only nee

Seite 1873 - PASSIVE-INTERFACE

Chapter 4: Basic Command Line Management Commands94This example displays the class of the value for the SPANNING-TREE HELLO-TIME command in the Global

Seite 1874 - ROUTER RIP

Chapter 60: GARP VLAN Registration Protocol940

Seite 1875 - SHOW IP RIP

941Chapter 61GARP VLAN Registration Protocol CommandsThe GARP VLAN registration protocol commands are summarized in Table 99 and described in detail w

Seite 1876

Chapter 61: GARP VLAN Registration Protocol Commands942“SHOW GVRP APPLICANT” on page 956User Exec and Privileged ExecDisplays parameters for the GIP-c

Seite 1877 - SHOW IP RIP COUNTER

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide943CONVERT DYNAMIC VLANSyntaxconvert dynamic vlanParametersNoneModeVLAN Configuration modeDescriptionUse thi

Seite 1878

Chapter 61: GARP VLAN Registration Protocol Commands944GVRP APPLICANT STATE ACTIVESyntaxgvrp applicant state activeParametersNoneModeGlobal Configurat

Seite 1879 - SHOW IP RIP INTERFACE

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide945GVRP APPLICANT STATE NORMALSyntaxgvrp applicant state normalParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDe

Seite 1880

Chapter 61: GARP VLAN Registration Protocol Commands946GVRP ENABLESyntaxgvrp enableParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this comm

Seite 1881 - TIMERS BASIC

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide947GVRP REGISTRATIONSyntaxgvrp registration normal|noneParametersnormalEnables GVRP on a port. This is the d

Seite 1882

Chapter 61: GARP VLAN Registration Protocol Commands948GVRP TIMER JOINSyntaxgvrp timer join valueParametersvalueSpecifies the Join Timer in centisecon

Seite 1883

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide949GVRP TIMER LEAVESyntaxgvrp timer leave valueParametersvalueSpecifies the Leave Timer in centiseconds, whi

Seite 1884

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide95CLEAR SCREENSyntaxclear screenParametersNoneModesUser Exec and Privileged Exec modesDescriptionUse this co

Seite 1885 - System Monitoring Commands

Chapter 61: GARP VLAN Registration Protocol Commands950GVRP TIMER LEAVEALLSyntaxgvrp timer leaveall valueParametersvalueSpecifies the Leave All Timer

Seite 1886 - SHOW CPU

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide951NO GVRP ENABLESyntaxno gvrp enableParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command

Seite 1887 - SHOW CPU HISTORY

Chapter 61: GARP VLAN Registration Protocol Commands952NO GVRP TIMER JOIN Syntaxno gvrp timer joinParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescripti

Seite 1888 - SHOW CPU USER-THREADS

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide953NO GVRP TIMER LEAVESyntaxno gvrp timer leave valueParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionU

Seite 1889 - SHOW MEMORY

Chapter 61: GARP VLAN Registration Protocol Commands954NO GVRP TIMER LEAVEALLSyntaxno gvrp timer leaveallParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDe

Seite 1890 - SHOW MEMORY ALLOCATION

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide955PURGE GVRPSyntaxpurge gvrpParametersNoneModeGlobal Configuration modeDescriptionUse this command to disab

Seite 1891 - SHOW MEMORY HISTORY

Chapter 61: GARP VLAN Registration Protocol Commands956SHOW GVRP APPLICANTSyntaxshow gvrp applicantParameterNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse

Seite 1892 - SHOW MEMORY POOLS

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide957SHOW GVRP CONFIGURATIONSyntaxshow gvrp configurationParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse

Seite 1893 - SHOW PROCESS

Chapter 61: GARP VLAN Registration Protocol Commands958SHOW GVRP MACHINESyntaxshow gvrp machineParameterNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse thi

Seite 1894

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide959SHOW GVRP STATISTICSSyntaxshow gvrp statisticsParameterNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this co

Seite 1895 - SHOW SYSTEM INTERRUPTS

Chapter 4: Basic Command Line Management Commands96CONFIGURE TERMINALSyntaxconfigure terminalParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this

Seite 1896 - SHOW TECH-SUPPORT

Chapter 61: GARP VLAN Registration Protocol Commands960 Receive GARP Messages: Empty Transmit GARP Messages: Empty Receive GARP Messages: Bad Messa

Seite 1897

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide961SHOW GVRP TIMERSyntaxshow gvrp timerParameterNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to d

Seite 1898

Chapter 61: GARP VLAN Registration Protocol Commands962

Seite 1899 - Appendix B

963Chapter 62MAC Address-based VLANsThis chapter contains the following topics: “Overview” on page 964 “Guidelines” on page 969 “General Steps” on

Seite 1900 - “Web Server” on page 1930

Chapter 62: MAC Address-based VLANs964OverviewAs explained in Chapter 58, “Port-based and Tagged VLANs” on page 879, VLANs are used to create independ

Seite 1901 - Boot Configuration File

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide965Obviously, mapping source MAC addresses to egress ports can become cumbersome if you are dealing with a M

Seite 1902 - Class of Service

Chapter 62: MAC Address-based VLANs966The switch can support more than one MAC-address VLAN at a time, and ports can be egress members of more than on

Seite 1903 - Console Port

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide967 If the packet’s destination MAC address is in the MAC address table, but the port where the address was

Seite 1904 - DHCP Relay

Chapter 62: MAC Address-based VLANs968VLAN Hierarchy The switch employs a VLAN hierarchy when handling untagged packets that arrive on a port that is

Seite 1905

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide969GuidelinesHere are the guidelines to MAC address-based VLANs: The switch can support up to a total of 40

Seite 1906

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide97COPY RUNNING-CONFIG STARTUP-CONFIGSyntaxcopy running-config startup-configParametersNoneModePrivileged Exe

Seite 1907 - Enhanced Stacking

Chapter 62: MAC Address-based VLANs970General StepsThere are three main steps to creating a MAC address-based VLAN:1. Use the VLAN MACADDRESS command

Seite 1908

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide971Creating MAC Address-based VLANsThe VLAN MACADDRESS command in the VLAN Configuration mode is the first c

Seite 1909 - IGMP Snooping

Chapter 62: MAC Address-based VLANs972Adding MAC Addresses to VLANs and Designating Egress PortsThe MAC addresses and egress ports are specified with

Seite 1910 - IGMP Snooping Querier

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide973Removing MAC AddressesTo remove MAC addresses from egress ports in a MAC address-based VLAN, use the NO V

Seite 1911

Chapter 62: MAC Address-based VLANs974Deleting VLANsTo delete MAC address-based VLANs from the switch, use the NO VLAN command in the VLAN Configurati

Seite 1912

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide975Displaying VLANsTo display the MAC address-based VLANS on the switch, use the SHOW VLAN MACADDRESS comman

Seite 1913 - MAC Address Table

Chapter 62: MAC Address-based VLANs976Example of Creating a MAC Address-based VLANHere is an example of how to create this type of VLAN. This example

Seite 1914 - Management IP Address

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide977Use the VLAN SET MACADDRESS command in the Port Interface mode to designate port 1 as an egress port of a

Seite 1915 - Manager Account

Chapter 62: MAC Address-based VLANs978

Seite 1916 - Port Settings

979Chapter 63MAC Address-based VLAN CommandsThe MAC address-based VLAN commands are summarized in Table 103 and described in detail within the chapter

Seite 1917

Chapter 4: Basic Command Line Management Commands98DISABLESyntaxdisableParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this command to return to

Seite 1918

Chapter 63: MAC Address-based VLAN Commands980NO VLANSyntaxno vlan vidParametersvidSpecifies the VID of the VLAN you want to delete. You can specify j

Seite 1919

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide981NO VLAN MACADDRESS (Global Configuration Mode)Syntaxno vlan vid macaddress|destaddress mac-addressParamet

Seite 1920 - Secure Shell Server

Chapter 63: MAC Address-based VLAN Commands982NO VLAN MACADDRESS (Port Interface Mode)Syntaxno vlan vid macaddress|destaddress mac-addressParametersvi

Seite 1921

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide983This example removes the MAC address 00:30:84:75:11:B2 from the egress port 11 to 14 in a VLAN with the V

Seite 1922 - SNMP Status Disabled

Chapter 63: MAC Address-based VLAN Commands984SHOW VLAN MACADDRESSSyntaxshow vlan macaddressParametersNoneModePrivileged Exec modeDescriptionUse this

Seite 1923 - Simple Network Time Protocol

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide985The information is described here.ExampleThe following example displays the MAC addresses and egress port

Seite 1924

Chapter 63: MAC Address-based VLAN Commands986VLAN MACADDRESSSyntaxvlan vid name name type macaddressParametersvidSpecifies a VLAN identifier in the r

Seite 1925 - Protocol

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide987ExampleThis example creates a MAC address-based VLAN that has the name Sales and the VID 3:awplus> ena

Seite 1926 - System Name

Chapter 63: MAC Address-based VLAN Commands988VLAN SET MACADDRESS (Global Configuration Mode)Syntaxvlan set vid macaddress|destaddress mac-addressPara

Seite 1927 - TACACS+ Client

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide989This example adds the MAC address 00:30:84:32:76:1A to a MAC address-based VLAN with the VID 12:awplus>

Seite 1928

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide99DOSyntaxdo commandParametercommandSpecifies the Privileged Exec mode command to perform. Refer to the Desc

Seite 1929

Chapter 63: MAC Address-based VLAN Commands990VLAN SET MACADDRESS (Port Interface Mode)Syntaxvlan set vid macaddress|destaddress mac-addressParameters

Seite 1930 - Web Server

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide991This example assigns the MAC address 00:30:84:75:11:B2 to ports 11 to 14 in a VLAN that has the VID 24:aw

Seite 1931 - Command Index

Chapter 63: MAC Address-based VLAN Commands992

Seite 1932

993Chapter 64 Private Port VLANsThis chapter provides the following topics: “Overview” on page 994 “Guidelines” on page 996 “Creating Private VLANs

Seite 1933

Chapter 64: Private Port VLANs994OverviewPrivate VLANs (also called private port VLANs) create special broadcast domains in which the traffic of the m

Seite 1934

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide995Private VLANFunctionalityThe following describes host and uplink port functionality in a private VLAN, an

Seite 1935

Chapter 64: Private Port VLANs996GuidelinesHere are the guidelines to private VLANs: A private VLAN can have any number of host ports, up to all the

Seite 1936

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide997Creating Private VLANsThe command to initially create private VLANs is the PRIVATE-VLAN command in the VL

Seite 1937

Chapter 64: Private Port VLANs998Adding Host and Uplink PortsPrivate VLANs have host ports and uplink ports. A private VLAN can have more than one upl

Seite 1938

AT-FS970M Switch Command Line User’s Guide999Deleting VLANsTo delete private VLANs from the switch, use the NO VLAN command in the VLAN Configuration

Kommentare zu diesen Handbüchern

Keine Kommentare